su(2)-irreducibly covariant quantum channels and some
TRANSCRIPT
SU(2)-Irreducibly Covariant Quantum Channels and Some
Applications
Muneerah Al Nuwairan
Thesis submitted to the Faculty of Graduate and Postdoctoral Studies
in partial fulfillment of the requirements for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy in
Mathematics 1
Department of Mathematics and Statistics
Faculty of Science
University of Ottawa
c© Muneerah Al Nuwairan, Ottawa, Canada, 2015
1The Ph.D. program is a joint program with Carleton University, administered by the Ottawa-Carleton Institute of Mathematics and Statistics
Abstract
In this thesis, we introduce EPOSIC channels, a class of SU(2) -covariant quantum
channels. For each of them, we give a Stinespring representation, a Kraus represen-
tation, its Choi matrix, a complementary channel, and its dual map. We show that
these channels are the extreme points of all SU(2) -irreducibly covariant channels. As
an application of these channels to the theory of quantum information, we study the
minimal output entropy of EPOSIC channels, and show that a large class of these
channels is a potential example of violating the well-known problem, the additivity
problem. We determine the cases where their minimal output entropy is not zero, and
obtain some partial results on the fulfillment of their entanglement breaking property.
We find a bound of the minimal output entropy of the tensor product of two SU(2)
-irreducibly covariant channels. We also get an example of a positive map that is not
completely positive.
ii
Resume
Dans cette these, nous introduisons une classe de canaux quantiques, les canaux
EPOSIC. Pour chacun d’entre eux, nous donnons leur representation de Stinespring,
leur decomposition de Kraus, leur matrice de Choi, leur canal complementaire, et
l’application duale. Nous montrons que ces canaux sont les points extremaux de tous
les canaux irreductibles SU(2)-covariants. En guise d’application de ces canaux a la
theorie de l’information quantique, nous etudions l’entropie minimale de sortie des
canaux EPOSIC, et montrons que beaucoup de ces canaux constituent des exemples
potentiels de violation du celebre probleme d’additivite de l’entropie minimale de
sortie. Nous determinons les canaux pour lesquels l’entropie minimale de sortie est
non nulle, et nous obtenons des resultats partiels pour la propriete de ’entanglement
breaking’ (cassage d’intrication). Nous trouvons une borne sur l’entropie minimale
de sortie du produit tensoriel de deux canaux irreductibles SU(2)-covariants. Nous
obtenons aussi un nouvel exemple d’application positive qui n’est pas completement
positive.
iii
Acknowledgements
This thesis was done under the supervision of professors B. Collins and T. Giordano.
I greatly appreciate their patient advice and help. I would also like to thank the
Saudi Arabia government, and King Faisal University whose support enabled me to
finish my studies and write this thesis.
iv
Contents
Introduction 1
Contributions 4
I The Extreme Points of SU(2)-Irreducibly Covariant
Quantum Channels 6
1 Preliminaries in Representation Theory 7
1.1 Representations of compact groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.2 G-equivariant maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1.2.1 Basic definitions and results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
1.2.2 Examples of G-equivariant maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2 Representations of SU(2) 27
2.1 The irreducible representations of SU(2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
2.2 Clebsch-Gordan expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
2.3 An SU(2)-equivariant isometry on the representation space of
SU(2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
2.3.1 The isometry αm,n,h . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
2.3.2 The matrix coefficients of αm,n,h . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
vi
CONTENTS vii
2.4 An application: The algebra End(Pm) as a direct sum of orthog-
onal SU(2)-subspaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
3 Introduction to Quantum Channels 54
3.1 Positive and completely positive maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
3.2 Quantum channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
3.2.1 Quantum systems and quantum states . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
3.2.2 Quantum channels, definition and examples . . . . . . . . . 58
3.2.3 Characterization of quantum channels . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
3.3 G-covariant quantum channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
4 EPOSIC Channels 70
4.1 EPOSIC channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
4.2 Kraus representations of EPOSIC channels . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
4.3 The Choi matrix of the EPOSIC channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
4.4 A channel complementary to the EPOSIC channel . . . . . . . . 82
4.5 Duals of EPOSIC channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
4.6 A positive map that is not completely positive . . . . . . . . . . 88
5 SU(2)-Irreducibly Covariant Channels 92
5.1 Extreme points of SU(2)-irreducibly covariant channels . . . . . 93
5.2 SU(2)-irreducibly covariant channel as direct sum of operators . 101
II The Minimal Output Entropy and The Entanglement
Breaking Property of EPOSIC Channels 112
6 The Minimal Output Entropy and The Entanglement Breaking
Property of Quantum Channels 113
6.1 The minimal output entropy of quantum channels . . . . . . . . 113
CONTENTS viii
6.2 The entanglement breaking property of quantum channels . . . . 117
6.3 The additivity of the classical capacity of quantum channels . . . 120
7 The Minimal Output Entropy and The Entanglement Breaking
Property of EPOSIC Channels 123
7.1 The minimal output entropy of EPOSIC channel . . . . . . . . . 124
7.2 Examples and special cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
7.2.1 The minimal output entropy of Φm,1,1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
7.2.2 Lower bound of the minimal output entropy of an element
in QC(P1, Pm)SU(2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
7.3 The entanglement breaking property of EPOSIC channels . . . . 134
8 The Minimal Output Entropy of the Tensor Product of SU(2)-
Irreducibly Covariant Channels 136
8.1 The tensor product of SU(2)-irreducibly covariant channels. . . . 137
8.2 Bound for the minimal output entropy of the tensor product of
two SU(2)-irreducibly covariant channels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
III Appendices 142
A Background Results in Operator Algebras 143
A.1 Background definitions and lemmas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
A.2 Positive and completely positive maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
A.3 Covariant Stinespring dilation theorem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
B Deferred Proofs 157
B.1 Deferred proofs in chapter 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
B.2 Proofs in chapter 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
B.3 Proofs in Chapter 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Introduction
According to Moore’s law, the power of computers can be doubled for the same cost
each two years [27, p.4]. Scientists believe that Moore’s law might not apply by
the 2020s, due to size difficulties. As a result, a lot of research efforts have been
directed toward computing at the atomic level, where the classical laws don’t apply,
and the need for quantum laws appears. That was the birth of quantum information
theory, which generalizes the classical one. Here is Holevo’s description of quantum
information theory in his address to the ICM in 2006 [17],
The problem of data transmission and storage by quantum informa-
tion carriers received increasing attention during past decade, owing to the
burst of activity in the field of quantum information and computation. At
present we are witnessing emergence of theoretical and experimental foun-
dations of the quantum information science. It represents a new exciting
research field addressing a number of fundamental issues in both quantum
physics and in information and computer sciences. On the other hand, it
provides a rich source of well-motivated mathematical problems.
In analogy to classical information theory, the quantum information one studies the
protocols of quantum transmissions for quantum information. A quantum channel (a
channel) is any method used to transfer the information from one or more quantum
systems to other quantum systems. This transmission of information is not always
accurate; the channel itself as well as the environment create noise which can cause
1
Introduction 2
information loss, and limit the efficiency of the quantum channel. The classical ca-
pacity of the channel is the maximum number of bits that can reliably be sent using
the channel [35]. A fundamental problem in quantum information theory is to de-
termine the classical capacity of a quantum channel. The additivity conjecture in
quantum information is that the classical capacity of a quantum channel is additive,
i.e, running two channels in parallel will not increase their total classical capacity.
A fundamental result of quantum information theory, The quantum coding theorem
[18, 32], shows that the additivity of the classical capacity can be inferred from the
additivity of another quantity, known as the Holevo bound or the Holevo capacity. In
2000, C. King and M. Ruskai [25] introduced the notion of minimal output entropy,
and P. Shor [36] (2004) showed that several conjectures in quantum information the-
ory are all equivalent. In particular, the Holevo capacity is additive if and only if the
minimal output entropy is. In 2008, Hastings [11] was able to show the existence of
a counter-example to the additivity of the minimal output entropy, using a random
construction. However, no explicit example was given.
In this thesis, we present an example of a new class of quantum channels, study their
properties, and their minimal output entropy. The thesis consists of two parts. In
Part I, we introduce the new channels, and study their properties. In Chapter 1, we
review the basic definitions and state all the related propositions and lemmas from
representation theory. In Chapter 2, we review the irreducible representations of
the group SU(2), and define an SU(2)-equivariant isometry. Chapter 3 contains all
needed background results from quantum information theory. Chapter 4 is devoted to
introducing and characterizing the new class of quantum channels, EPOSIC channels
(the Extreme Points Of SU(2)-Irreducibly Covariant channels), to compute Kraus
operators for them, and to find their Choi matrices. The chapter ends by giving an
example of a positive map that is not completely positive, using EPOSIC channels. In
Chapter 5, we study the SU(2)-irreducibly covariant channels, and show that EPOSIC
channels are the extreme points of this set. Part II consist of three chapters, chapter 6
Introduction 3
contains the definitions and all needed results about the minimal output entropy and
the entanglement breaking property for a quantum channel (E.B.T). It also explains
their relation to the additivity of classical capacity of quantum channel. In chapter 7,
we study the minimal output entropy, and E.B.T property of the EPOSIC channels.
Chapter 8 studies the minimal output entropy of the tensor product of two SU(2)-
irreducibly covariant channels.
Contributions
In this section, we list the contributions of the thesis. We hope that our results will
be a significant addition to the field of operator algebra and quantum information
theory. Our main contributions can be summarized as follows:
1. Constructing EPOSIC channels (Proposition 4.1.1), a new class of quantum
channels that form the extreme points of all SU(2)-irreducibly covariant chan-
nels (Corollary 5.1.5).
2. Giving a full description of the EPOSIC channel, by obtaining a Stinespring
representation, a Kraus representation, the Choi matrix of the EPOSIC chan-
nel (Definition 4.2.1, and Proposition 4.3.5), computing a channel complemen-
tary to EPOSIC channel, and computing its dual map (Proposition 4.4.4, and
Proposition 4.5.6).
3. Showing that any SU(2)-irreducibly covariant channel is an orthogonal direct
sum of operators (Corollary 5.2.4).
4. For an SU(2)-irreducible subspace H, we give explicit formulae for the pro-
jections of End(H) into its SU(2)-irreducible invariant subspaces (Proposition
2.4.2).
5. Proving that any completely positive SU(2)-irreducibly equivariant map is a
multiple of an SU(2)-covariant channel (Corollary 5.1.6).
4
Contributions 5
6. Obtaining an example of a positive, non-completely positive map (Proposition
4.6.3, and Proposition 4.6.5).
7. As applications in quantum information theory, we were able to
(a) Determine the EPOSIC channels with zero minimal output entropy (Propo-
sition 7.1.1, and Corollary 7.1.7).
(b) Find a lower bound of the minimal output entropy of some of SU(2)-
irreducibly covariant channels (Proposition 7.2.13).
(c) Examine the entanglement breaking property of EPOSIC channel (Section
7.3).
(d) Obtain an upper bound on the minimal output entropy for the tensor
product of two SU(2)-irreducibly covariant channels (Corollary 8.2.4).
Chapter 1
Preliminaries in Representation
Theory
The construction and study of the channels we present in this thesis depend heavily
on the representations of the group SU(2). The present chapter contains background
definitions and results from representation theory that are needed for the thesis. For
more details, we refer the reader to [3], [9], [13], [29], [33] and [38]. The definition of
Hilbert spaces, and all related basic mathematical results are in Appendix A. In this
thesis, we assume all vector spaces to be complex vector spaces of finite dimension.
1.1 Representations of compact groups
Definition 1.1.1. A topological group is a set G which has both the structure of a
group and a topological space, such that the group operations (x, y) 7→ xy and x 7→ x−1
are continuous. A compact group is a topological group whose topology is compact.
Examples 1.1.2.
1. Any finite group endowed with the discrete topology is a compact group.
7
1. Preliminaries in Representation Theory 8
2. The unit circle under complex multiplication, and with the usual topology is an
infinite compact group.
3. The real numbers R under the usual addition +, and with the usual topology
is a non-compact topological group.
4. Let H be a finite dimensional complex vector space. The set of all invertible
linear maps A : H −→ H forms a group under composition, called the general
linear group, denoted by GL(H).
5. For n ∈ N, let Mn(C) denote the set of n× n-complex matrices. The subsets
U(n) = T ∈Mn(C) : TT ∗ = In and SL(n) = T ∈Mn(C) : det(T ) = 1,
form subgroups of GL(n,C), called the unitary group and the special linear
group, respectively. The unitary group U(n), and its subgroup, the special
unitary group SU(n) = U(n) ∩ SL(n), are compact topological groups.
Following [30, p.13, 128] and [37, p.21], we have:
Definition 1.1.3. Let G be a group, and H be a vector space.
1. A representation of G in H is a group homomorphism πH : G −→ GL(H).
If H is a Hilbert space, and πH(g) is a unitary operator for each g ∈ G, we say
πH is a unitary representation.
2. If G is a topological group, and H is a Banach space, then a continuous repre-
sentation of G is a representation πH such that the map
G×H −→ H
(g, h) 7−→ πH(g)(h), h ∈ H
is continuous.
1. Preliminaries in Representation Theory 9
The space H is called the representation space of πH. If H is finite dimensional,
we say the representation is finite dimensional. The dimension of H is called the
degree of the representation [37, p.21].
Notation 1.1.4. We denote a representation πH of a group G in a Hilbert space H
by (H, πH)G. If the group G is clear from context then we may omit the subscript G.
Examples 1.1.5.
1. Let G be a group, and H be a vector space. The trivial representation of G
is the map πH : G −→ End(H) defined by taking any element g ∈ G to the
identity map on H.
2. For a locally compact group G there exist a left invariant (Haar) measure µ on
G, where L2(G, dµ) = f : G −→ C :∫|f |2 dµ < ∞ is a Hilbert space. The
left regular representation of G in L2(G, dµ) [30, p.132], is a unitary faithful
representation of G.
3. Let n ∈ N. By representing the vectors in Cn as n × 1 matrices, the groups
U(n) and SU(n) have representations in Cn given by matrix multiplication.
These representations are called the standard representations of U(n) and SU(n)
respectively [3, p.69].
Example 1.1.6. Let (H, πH) be a representation of a group G. The following are
representations of G in H, where H denotes the conjugate space of H (see Appendix
A for definition of H).
1. πH : G −→ GL(H) by πH(g) = πtH(g−1), for g ∈ G.
2. πH : G −→ GL(H) by πH(g) = πH(g), for g ∈ G.
The representations πH and πH are called the contragredient, and the conjugate
representation of πH respectively. They coincide when πH is unitary.
1. Preliminaries in Representation Theory 10
Definition 1.1.7. Let (H, πH) be a representation of a group G. Then
1. A subspace W of H is called G -invariant if πH(g)(W ) ⊆ W for each g ∈ G.
The restriction of πH to a G-invariant subspace is called a subrepresentation of
πH.
2. The space H is G-irreducible if it has no proper nonzero G-invariant subspaces.
In this case, the representation πH is called an irreducible representation.
We restrict the use of the symbol ρ to irreducible representations.
Examples 1.1.8.
1. Any irreducible representation of an abelian group is one dimensional [8, p.71].
2. For n ∈ N, let Sn be the symmetric group of 1, 2, ..., n. The irreducible
representations of Sn are in one-to-one correspondence with the partitions of n
[9, p.44-54].
3. For m,n ∈ N, let P(m,n) be the space of homogenous polynomials of degree m
in n variables x = (x1, x2, ..., xn) over C. The group GL(n,C) has a represen-
tation in P(m,n) given by
π(g)(f(x)) = f(xg)
for f ∈ P(m,n) and g ∈ GL(n,C), where xg denotes matrix multiplication.
For Hilbert spaces H and K, let End(H,K) denote the vector space of linear
maps from H to K. If H and K are finite-dimensional, then End(H,K) is a Hilbert
space endowed with the Hilbert-Schmidt inner product given by 〈A |B 〉End(H,K)
=
tr(A∗B) for A,B ∈ End(H,K). As usual, we write End(H) for End(H,H), and IH
for the identity map on H.
1. Preliminaries in Representation Theory 11
Proposition 1.1.9. Let (H, πH) and (K, πK) be two representations of a group G.
The map
πH,K : G −→ End(End(H,K))
g 7−→ πK(g)AπH(g−1)
defines a representation of G in End(H,K). The representation πH,K is unitary if
both πH and πKare.
Proof:
It is straightforward to show that πH,K is a group homomorphism, given that πH
and πK are. For A,B ∈ End(H,K), we have:
〈A |πH,K(g)B 〉End(H,K)
= tr(A∗πK(g)BπH(g−1)) = tr(πH(g−1)A∗πK(g)B)
= tr ((πH,K(g−1)A)∗B) = 〈πH,K(g−1)A |B 〉End(H,K)
By the uniqueness of the adjoint map, we have
(πH,K(g))∗ = πH,K(g−1)
Remark 1.1.10. If (H, πH) and (K, πK) are two representations of a group G, then
unless specified otherwise, the representation of G on End(H,K) will be taken to be
the one as given in Proposition 1.1.9.
1.2 G-equivariant maps
In this section, we provide all needed information about G-equivariant maps. The
first subsection contains the definitions and propositions. The second one presents a
list of examples of G-equivariant maps that are required for the thesis.
1. Preliminaries in Representation Theory 12
1.2.1 Basic definitions and results
Definition 1.2.1. [29, p.13] Let (H, πH) and (K, πK) be two representations of a
group G. A linear map α : H −→ K is said to be G-equivariant if
πK(g)α = απH(g)
for all g ∈ G.
The set of G-equivariant maps forms a vector space, denoted End(H,K)G, and
called the space of intertwining operators. The space End(H,H)G is abbreviated to
End(H)G. Following [3, p.67], we have
Definition 1.2.2. Let (H, πH) and (K, πK) be two representations of a group G.
We say that the two representations are G-equivalent if there exists a G-equivariant
isomorphism α : H −→ K. In such a case, the spaces H and K are called G-
equivalent, or G-isomorphic.
Proposition 1.2.3. Let G be a compact group. Then
1. Every representation of G in a Hilbert space is equivalent to a unitary represen-
tation [30, p.15].
2. Every representation of G in a Hilbert space is equivalent to a direct sum of
irreducible representations [37, p.155-157], and [3, p.68].
3. Every irreducible representation of G in a Banach space is finite-dimensional
[30, p.46].
Henceforth, we assume all vector spaces to be complex vector spaces of finite
dimension.
Proposition 1.2.4. Let (H, πH) and (K, πK) be two unitary representations of a
group G. The map Φ : End(H) −→ End(K) is G-equivariant if and only if
Φ(πH(g)Aπ∗H(g)) = πK(g)Φ(A)π∗K(g)
1. Preliminaries in Representation Theory 13
for all A ∈ End(H) and g ∈ G.
Proposition 1.2.5. For i = 1, 2, let (Hi, πHi) and (Ki, πKi) be representations of a
group G, and Φi : End(Hi) −→ End(Ki) be G-equivariant maps. The tensor product
and the direct sum of Φ1 and Φ2 are G-equivariant maps with respect to the actions
on the tensor product and the direct sum respectively. If Φ1 and Φ2 are composable
then their composition is also G-equivariant.
See Appendix A for definitions of the tensor product, the direct sum of two maps,
and the actions defined on their representation spaces.
Definition 1.2.6. Let H and K be Hilbert spaces, and α ∈ End(H,K). Conjugation
by α is the linear map
Adα : End(H) −→ End(K)
A 7−→ αAα∗
where α∗ is the conjugate map of α.
Proposition 1.2.7. Let (H, πH) and (K, πK) be two unitary representations of a
group G, and α : H −→ K be a G-equivariant map. Then
1. The image under α of a G-invariant subspace of H is G-invariant.
2. The conjugate of α is G-equivariant.
3. Conjugation by α is G-equivariant.
4. If α is an injective map then the image under α of any G-irreducible subspace
of H is G-irreducible.
Notation 1.2.8. For a subspace W of a Hilbert space H, let ιW denote the inclusion
map of W, and qW denote the orthogonal projection onto W .
1. Preliminaries in Representation Theory 14
Both maps are elements in End(H) (redefine ιW to be the identity map on W
and the zero on the orthogonal complement of W ). With this definition, the inclusion
map ιW is the conjugate of qW .
Remark 1.2.9. If (H, πH) is a unitary representation of a group G then the orthog-
onal complement of any G-invariant subspace is also G-invariant. For more details,
see [37, p.24], and [8, p.70].
Lemma 1.2.10. Let (H, πH) be a representation of a group G. The subspace W of
H is G-invariant if and only if qW (resp. ιW ) is a G-equivariant map.
Proof:
Suppose that W is G-invariant, and g ∈ G . Since any element h ∈ H can be
written as x+ y such that x ∈ W and y ∈ W⊥, then by the remark above, we have
qWπH(g)(h) = qW (πH(g)(x) + πH(g)(y)) = πH(g)(x) = πH(g)qW (h)
i.e. qW is G-equivariant. On other hand, if qW is G-equivariant then for w ∈ W and
g ∈ G, we have:
πH(g)(w) = πH(g)qW (w) = qWπH(g)(w) ∈ W.
Since ιW = q∗W , the equivalent follows for ιW .
Remark 1.2.11. Let H be a Hilbert space. If W is a subspace of H, given by the
orthogonal projection qW , then End(W ) is isomorphic to a subspace of End(H), given
by the projection AdqW . It follows that if (H, πH) is a representation of a group G with
a G-invariant subspace W then End(W ) is G-isomorphic to a G-invariant subspace
of End(H).
The following proposition is one of the main pillars in the study of group repre-
sentations. It is stated and proved in [9, p.7] for finite groups, but the method of the
proof is valid in the general case.
1. Preliminaries in Representation Theory 15
Proposition 1.2.12. (Schur’s Lemma) Let (H1, ρ1) and (H2, ρ2) be two irreducible
representations of a group G. If α : H1 −→ H2 is a G-equivariant map then either
α ≡ 0 or α is a G-isomorphism. In case of ρ1 = ρ2 and H1 = H2 then α is a multiple
of the identity.
Corollary 1.2.13. Let (H, πH) be a unitary representation of a group G. Any two
non isomorphic G-irreducible subspaces of H are mutually orthogonal.
Proof:
Let W1 and W2 be two G-invariant irreducible subspaces of H. By Lemma
1.2.10, the associated orthogonal projections qW1and qW2
are G-equivariant, hence
so is the map qW1q∗W2
= qW1ιW2
: W2 −→ W1. By Schur’s Lemma 1.2.12, the map
qW1q∗W2
= qW1qW2
is either the zero map or an isomorphism.
The proof of the next lemma is given in [9, p.7] for the case of finite groups (see
also [13, p.333 (21.40)]). However, the same statement and proof are valid for the
finite dimensional representation of compact group. Recall that we assumed that all
vector spaces are finite dimensional.
Lemma 1.2.14. Let (H, πH) be a representation of a compact group G. There exists
a decomposition
H = U⊕a11 ⊕ ...⊕ U⊕akk
where Ui are G-irreducible distinct subspaces. The decomposition of H into a direct
sum of the k factors is unique, as are the Ui occur and their multiplicities ai.
Definition 1.2.15. The number ai in Lemma 1.2.14, is called the multiplicity of the
subspace Ui.
Corollary 1.2.16. Let (H, πH) be a representation of a compact group G. Ifn⊕i=1
Ui and
m⊕j=1
Vj are two decompositions of H into G-irreducible subspaces of distinct dimensions
1. Preliminaries in Representation Theory 16
then m = n, and for each 1 ≤ i ≤ n, there exists a permutation σ ∈ Sn such that
Ui = Vσ(i).
Proof:
Fix 1 ≤ i ≤ n, by Lemma 1.2.14, m = n, and there exists a permutation σ ∈ Snsuch that Ui ' Vσ(i). Since all Vj have distinct dimensions then by Schur’s Lemma,
the subspaces Ui and Vj are orthogonal for each j 6= σ(i). Hence
Ui ⊆
⊕j 6=σ(i)
Vj
⊥ = Vσ(i).
Since Ui and Vσ(i) have the same dimension then Ui = Vσ(i).
Proposition 1.2.17. Let (H, πH) be a representation of a group G, such that H =m⊕i=1
Wi, where Wi are G-irreducible subspaces of H of multiplicity one. The space
End(H)G is a commutative algebra, that is spanned by the G-equivariant projections
on Wi : 1 ≤ i ≤ m.
Proof:
Let qi : H −→ Wi be the orthogonal projection onto the G-invariant subspace
Wi, and ιs : Ws −→ H be the inclusion map of Ws. By Lemma 1.2.10, the maps qi
and ιs are G-equivariant. Hence, for T ∈ End(H)G, the map qsTιi : Wi −→ Ws is
a G-equivariant map, intertwining the G-irreducible representations Ws and Wi. As
the multiplicity of each Wi is one, by Schur’s Lemma 1.2.12, we have
qsTιi =
0 s 6=i
λiIi s=i
where Ii is the identity map on Wi. As for h ∈ H, we can write h = w1 +w2 + ...+wm
where wi = qi(h), hence
T (h) = T (w1 + w2 + ...+ wm)
1. Preliminaries in Representation Theory 17
= λ1w1 + λ2w2 + ...+ λmwm
= λ1q1(h) + λ2q2(h) + ...+ λmqm(h)
=m∑i=1
λiqi(h).
To see that End(H)G is commutative, let T1 and T2 are two elements in End(H)G,
such that T1 =m∑i=1
λiqi and T2 =m∑s=1
µsqs. Since qi : 1 ≤ i ≤ m are mutually
orthogonal projections, then
T1T2 =m∑i=1
m∑i=1
λiµsqiqs =m∑i=1
λiµiqiqi
=m∑i=1
µiλiqi =m∑s=1
m∑i=1
µsλiqsqi = T2T1.
Proposition 1.2.18. Let (H, πH), (K, πK) and (E, πE) be unitary representations of
a group G, and α : H −→ K ⊗ E be a G-equivariant map. The map
T : E −→ End(H,K)
u 7−→ (IK ⊗ u∗)α
is G-equivariant, where u∗ denote the linear form on E given by u∗(z) = 〈u |z 〉E
.
Proof:
Let g ∈ G, and u ∈ E arbitrary elements. As πK(g)⊗ u∗ = πK(g)(IK ⊗ u∗) (check
on x⊗ y), we have
T (πE(g) (u)) = (IK ⊗ u∗π∗E(g))α = (IK ⊗ u∗π∗E(g)) ((πK(g)⊗ πE(g))απ∗H(g))
= (πK(g)⊗ u∗)απ∗H(g) = πK(g) (IK ⊗ u∗)απ∗H(g) = πK(g)T (u)π∗H(g)
i.e. T is G-equivariant.
1. Preliminaries in Representation Theory 18
Corollary 1.2.19. Let (H, πH), (K, πK), and (E, πE) be representations of a group
G such that πE is irreducible, and let α : H −→ K ⊗ E be a G-equivariant isometry.
If ej : 1 ≤ j ≤ dE is an orthonormal basis for E, then the set
Tj =(IK ⊗ e∗j
)α : 1 ≤ j ≤ dE ⊆ End(H,K)
satisfies
〈Tj1 |Tj2 〉End(H,K)= dH
dEδj1j2
for 1 ≤ j1, j2 ≤ dE.
Proof: Consider the G-equivariant map T : E −→ End(H,K), defined in Propo-
sition 1.2.18. By Schur’s Lemma 1.2.12, the map T ∗T : E −→ E is a multiple of the
identity on E. Thus, there exist λ ∈ C such that
〈T (u) |T (v)〉End(H,K)
= 〈u |T ∗T (v)〉E
= 〈u |λv 〉E
for any u, v ∈ E. Since
T (ej1) = Tj1 , and T (ej2) = Tj2 for 0 ≤ j1, j2 ≤ dE.
then
〈Tj1 |Tj2 〉End(H,K)= 〈T (ej1) |T (ej2)〉
End(H,K)
= λ 〈ej1 |ej2 〉E = λδj1j2
As Tj =(IK ⊗ e∗j
)α, the map α is equal to
dE∑j=1
Tj ⊗ ej. Let fi : 1 ≤ i ≤ dH be an
orthonormal basis of H, then
dH =dH∑i=1
‖α(fi)‖2 =dH∑i=1
∥∥∥∥ dE∑j=1
Tj(fi)⊗ ej∥∥∥∥2
=
dH∑i=1
dE∑j=1
‖Tj(fi)‖2 =
dE∑j=1
‖Tj‖2 =
dE∑j=1
λ = dEλ
i.e. λ = dHdE
.
1. Preliminaries in Representation Theory 19
1.2.2 Examples of G-equivariant maps
In this subsection, we provide examples, and standard constructions of G-equivariant
maps. Recall that if (H, πH) and (K, πK) are representations of a group G, then
πH ⊗ πK is a representation of G in the space H ⊗ K. The new representation is
defined naturally by linearly extending πH ⊗ πK(g)(h⊗ k) = πH(g) (h) ⊗ πK(g) (k) for
g ∈ G, and h, k ∈ H,K. For two matrices A = (aij) and B = (blk), the Kronecker
product of A and B is defined to be A⊗B = (Ablk).
I. The partial trace:
Definition 1.2.20. Let H and K be Hilbert spaces. The linear map
TrH : End(H ⊗K) −→ End(K)
A⊗B 7−→ tr(A)B
defined for A⊗B∈End(H ⊗K), and extended by linearity is called the partial trace
over H.
In similar way, we define the partial trace over K by taking the trace over the
second component of A⊗B.
Lemma 1.2.21. Let (H, πH) and (K, πK) be two unitary representations of a group
G. The partial trace over H is a G-equivariant map.
Proof:
Let g ∈ G, and A1 ⊗ A2 ∈ End(H ⊗K). Then
TrH ((πH(g)⊗ πK(g)) (A1 ⊗ A2) (π∗H(g)⊗ π∗K(g)))
= TrH(πH(g)A1π∗H(g)⊗ πK(g)A2π
∗K(g))
1. Preliminaries in Representation Theory 20
= tr(πH(g)A1π∗H(g))πK(g)A2π
∗K(g)
= tr(A1)πK(g)A2π∗K(g) = πK(g)TrH(A1 ⊗ A2)π∗K(g)
II. The flipping map (swap map):
Our second example of G-equivariant maps is defined on the tensor product of two
vector spaces H and K. It is called the flipping map (swap map), and denoted by
flipHK.
Definition 1.2.22. Let H and K be Hilbert spaces. We define the linear map
flipHK : H ⊗K −→ K ⊗H
via
h⊗ k 7−→ k ⊗ h
on the set h⊗ k : h ∈ H, k ∈ K and then extended linearly.
Lemma 1.2.23. Let (H, πH) and (K, πK) be two representations of a group G. The
map flipHK is a unitary G-equivariant map satisfying (flipHK)∗ = flipKH and
TrK(flipHK AflipK
H) = TrK(A)
for A ∈ End(H ⊗K).
Proof:
Let g ∈ G. For h⊗ k ∈ H ⊗K, we have
(πK(g)⊗ πH(g)) flipHK(h⊗ k) = (πK(g)⊗ πH(g)) (k ⊗ h)
1. Preliminaries in Representation Theory 21
= πK(g)(k)⊗ πH(g)(h) = flipHK(πH(g)(h)⊗ πK(g)(k))
= flipHK (πH(g)⊗ πK(g)) (h⊗ k)
G-equivariance follows by linearity. Since for (h ⊗ k) ∈ H ⊗K, ‖h⊗ k‖ = ‖k ⊗ h‖,
flipHK is a unitary map such that (flipHK)∗ = (flipHK)−1 = flipKH .
To prove the second assertion, let B1 ∈ End(H) and B2 ∈ End(K). By direct
computations on arbitrary element k ⊗ h, we have
flipHK (B1 ⊗B2) flipKH = B2 ⊗B1
Hence,
TrK(flipHK (B1 ⊗B2) (flipHK)∗) = tr(B2)B1 = TrK(B1 ⊗B2).
The result follows by linearity.
III. The map Vec:
Recall that xy∗ : x ∈ K, y ∈ H forms a set of generators of End(H,K), where
y∗ denotes the linear form on H given by y∗(z) = 〈y |z 〉H
, and xy∗ denotes the map
xy∗(z) = 〈y |z 〉Hx for any z ∈ H. The following is a reformulation of the definition
of the map vec in [41, p.23].
Definition 1.2.24. Let H and K be Hilbert spaces, let Vec : End(H,K) −→ K ⊗H
be the linear map defined on the elements xy∗ of End(H,K) via
xy∗ 7−→ x⊗ y
extended linearly.
The map Vec represents any element in End(H,K) as a vector in the tensor
product space K ⊗H.
1. Preliminaries in Representation Theory 22
Lemma 1.2.25. Let (H, πH) and (K, πK) be two representations of a group G. By
considering the conjugate representation on H, the map
Vec : End(H,K) −→ K ⊗H
is a G-equivariant unitary map.
Proof:
Let ei : 1 ≤ i ≤ dH and e′j : 1 ≤ j ≤ dK be orthonormal bases for H and K
respectively, hence the set Eij = eie′∗j : 1 ≤ i ≤ dH, 1 ≤ j ≤ dK is an orthonormal
basis for End(H,K). For g ∈ G and Eij ∈ End(H,K), we have
Vec(πK(g)Eijπ∗H(g)) = Vec
(πK(g)ei
(πH(g)e′j
)∗)= πK(g)ei ⊗ πH(g)e′j
= (πK ⊗ πH) (g)(ei ⊗ e′j) = (πK ⊗ πH) (g)Vec(Eij).
The G-equivariant follows by linearity of the map Vec. Clearly Vec is a linear bijection
which is unitary since
〈A |B 〉End(H,K)
= 〈Vec(A) |Vec(B)〉K⊗H
for A,B ∈ End(H,K).
IV. The Choi-Jamiolkowski map:
The following is an equivalent definition of the Choi-Jamiolkowski map in [41, p.49];
we show this equivalence in Lemma 1.2.30.
Definition 1.2.26. Let H and K be Hilbert spaces. The linear map
C : End(End(H), End(K)) −→ End(K ⊗H)
AB∗ 7−→ A⊗B
1. Preliminaries in Representation Theory 23
defined for A ∈ End(K) and B ∈ End(H) and extended linearly is called the Choi-
Jamiolkowski map. The map B∗ : End(H) −→ C is given by B∗X = 〈B |X 〉End(H)
for X ∈ End(H).
Lemma 1.2.27. Let (H, πH) and (K, πK) be two representations of a group G. The
natural isomorphism T : End(K)⊗End(H) −→ End(K⊗H) defined by taking A⊗B
to T (A⊗B)(k ⊗ h) = A(k)⊗B(h) and extending linearly is a G-equivariant map.
Recall that for finite-dimensional Hilbert spaces H and K, the spaces
End(End(H), End(K)), End(K)⊗End(H)∗, End(K)⊗End(H), and End(K ⊗H)
are all algebraically isomorphic. The spaces End(H) and End(H) are equal. See
Appendix A, for more details.
Remark 1.2.28. The Choi-Jamiolkowski map is the composition of the maps
Vec : End(End(H), End(K)) −→ End(K)⊗ End(H) = End(K)⊗ End(H)
with the natural isomorphism T : End(K) ⊗ End(H) −→ End(K ⊗ H), defined in
Lemma 1.2.27.
By Lemma 1.2.25, and the remark above, we have:
Corollary 1.2.29. Let (H, πH) and (K, πK) be two representations of a group G. The
Choi-Jamiolkowski map is unitarily G-equivariant.
The Choi-Jamiolkowski map assigns to each Φ ∈ End(End(H), End(K)) a
unique matrix C(Φ) ∈ End(K ⊗H), called the Choi matrix of Φ. The next lemma
shows the equivalency of Definition 1.2.26, and the original definition of Choi-Jamiolkowski
map in [23, p.276], and [41, p.49].
Lemma 1.2.30. Let H and K be Hilbert spaces. For Φ ∈ End(End(H), End(K)),
the Choi matrix of Φ is given by
C(Φ) =∑i,j
Φ(Eij)⊗ Eij
where Eij : 0 ≤ i, j ≤ dH is the standard orthonormal basis for End(H).
1. Preliminaries in Representation Theory 24
Proof:
It suffices to show the equality for Φ = AB∗, where A ∈ End(K) and B ∈
End(H).
Let B =dH∑k,l
λklEkl, then
dH∑ij
AB∗(Eij)⊗ Eij =
dH∑ij
A 〈B |Eij 〉 ⊗ Eij =
dH∑ij
Aλij ⊗ Eij
= A⊗dH∑ij
λijEij = A⊗dH∑ij
λijEij
= A⊗B = C(AB∗)
Next we determine the conditions on the Choi matrix of a linear map that are
equivalent to G-equivariance. The idea of the proof is taken from [7, p.5].
Lemma 1.2.31. Let H and K be Hilbert spaces. For Φ ∈ End(End(H), End(K)),
αK ∈ End(K), and αH ∈ End(H) we have:
1. C(AdαK Φ) = (αK ⊗ IH)C(Φ)(αK ⊗ IH)∗.
2. C(Φ AdαH ) = (IK ⊗ αH)∗C(Φ)(IK ⊗ αH).
Proof:
Let Eij : 0 ≤ i, j ≤ dH be the standard orthonormal basis for End(H). By
Lemma 1.2.30, we have
(αK ⊗ IH)C(Φ)(αK ⊗ IH)∗ = (αK ⊗ IH)
(∑i,j
Φ(Eij)⊗ Eij
)(αK ⊗ IH)∗
1. Preliminaries in Representation Theory 25
=∑i,j
(αK ⊗ IH) (Φ(Eij)⊗ Eij) (αK ⊗ IH)∗
=∑i,j
(αKΦ(Eij)α∗K)⊗ (IHEijI
∗H)
=∑i,j
(AdαK Φ(Eij))⊗ Eij = C(AdαK Φ)
establishing the first equality. For the second equality, let A ∈ End(K) and B ∈
End(H), it suffices to show that the equality holds for Φ = AB∗. Let D ∈ End(H),
we have:
AB∗ AdαH (D) = AB∗ (αHDα∗H) = A 〈B | αHDα∗H〉End(H)
= tr(αHDα∗HB∗)A = tr(D(α∗HBαH)∗)A
= A 〈αHBα∗H | D〉End(H)= A(α∗HBαH)∗(D)
that is,
AB∗ AdαH = A(α∗HBαH)∗
consequently,
C(AB∗ AdαH ) = C(A(α∗HBαH)∗) = A⊗ α∗HBαH
= IKAIK ⊗ α∗HBαH = (IK ⊗ αH)∗(A⊗B
)(IK ⊗ αH)
= (IK ⊗ αH)∗C(AB∗)(IK ⊗ αH).
Recall that for a group G, and a Hilbert space H, the set End(H)G denotes the
set of G-equivariant maps on H.
Proposition 1.2.32. Let (H, πH) and (K, πK) be two unitary representations of a
group G. A linear map Φ : End(H) −→ End(K) is G-equivariant if and only if
C(Φ) ∈ End(K ⊗H)G.
1. Preliminaries in Representation Theory 26
Proof:
By injectivity of the Choi-Jamiolkowski map, Φ is G-equivariant if and only if
C(AdπK(g) Φ) = C(Φ AdπH(g)) ∀g ∈ G
By Lemma 1.2.31, this holds if and only if
(πK(g)⊗ IH(g))C(Φ)(πK(g)⊗ IH(g))∗ = (IK(g)⊗ πH(g))∗C(Φ)(IK(g)⊗ πH(g)) ∀g ∈ G
⇐⇒ (πK(g)⊗ πH(g))C(Φ) = C(Φ)(πK(g)⊗ πH(g)) ∀g ∈ G
⇐⇒ C(Φ) ∈ End(K ⊗H)G.
Chapter 2
Representations of SU(2)
According to the Clebsch-Gordan Decomposition [3, p.87], if H and K are two SU(2)-
irreducible subspaces, then the SU(2)-space K ⊗ E is isomorphic to⊕i
Hi where Hi
is SU(2)-irreducible subspace with multiplicity one. For each i, the inclusion map
αi : Hi −→ K ⊗ E is SU(2)-equivariant. Our main goal in this chapter is to find
an explicit formula for the map αi. In the first section, we review the irreducible
representations of SU(2), and for an SU(2)-irreducible space H, we find an SU(2)-
equivariant unitary map from H onto H. In Section 2.2, we state the Clebsch-
Gordan expansion theorem. We get our main result of this chapter in Section 2.3,
by constructing an SU(2)-equivariant isometry defined on the representation space
of the SU(2)-irreducible representation. We end this chapter with an application of
our results, in Section 2.4. The proofs of some Lemmas and corollaries in this chapter
are purely technical calculations, and are deferred to Appendix B.
The main results of this chapter:
• Constructing an SU(2)-equivariant unitary map between any SU(2)-irreducible
space, and its corresponding conjugate space (Proposition 2.1.6).
27
2. Representations of SU(2) 28
• Constructing an SU(2)-equivariant isometry defined on the representation space
of the SU(2)-irreducible representation (Proposition 2.3.3, and Proposition 2.3.5).
• For an SU(2)-irreducible subspace H, we give explicit formulae for the pro-
jections of End(H) into its SU(2)-irreducible invariant subspaces (Proposition
2.4.2).
2.1 The irreducible representations of SU(2)
For m ∈ N, let Pm denote the space of homogeneous polynomials, with complex
coefficients, of degree m in the two variables x1, x2. It is a complex vector space of
dimension m + 1 with a basisxi1x
m−i2 : 0 ≤ i ≤ m
. By convention, we denote by
P−1 the zero vector space. Recall that
SU(2) =
a b
−b a
: a, b ∈ C, |a|2 + |b|2 = 1
Definition 2.1.1. For m ∈ N, define ρm : SU(2) −→ End(Pm) by
(ρm(g)f) (x1,x2) = f ((x1,x2)g) = f(ax1 − bx2, bx1 + ax2)
for f ∈ Pm and g ∈ SU(2).
The next proposition summarizes results in [3, p. 85-86], [38, p.181], and [39,
p.276-279].
Proposition 2.1.2.
1. For m ∈ N, ρm is a unitary representation of SU(2) with respect to the inner
product on Pm given by
⟨xl1x
m−l2 , xk1x
m−k2
⟩Pm
= l! (m− l)! δlk
2. Representations of SU(2) 29
2. The set ρm : m ∈ N constitutes the full list of the irreducible representations
of SU(2).
To facilitate the computations, we choose the orthonormal basis for Pm given
by the polynomialsfml = almx
l1x
m−l2 : 0 ≤ l ≤ m
where alm =
1√l!(m−l)!
; this basis is
called canonical [39, p.280]. Throughout this thesis, we utilize the following definition
and notation:
Definition 2.1.3. For m ∈ N, the set fml : 0 ≤ l ≤ m is called the standard basis
for the SU(2)-irreducible space Pm. The corresponding standard basis for End(Pm) is
Elk = fml−1fm∗k−1 : 1 ≤ l, k ≤ m+ 1.
Remarks 2.1.4. Let g = a b
−b a
∈ SU(2). For m ∈ N, we have
1. The map ρm(g) is given on the standard basis for Pm by
ρm(g)(fml ) = alm(ax1 − bx2)l(bx1 + ax2)m−l
In particular, for g0 = 0 1
−1 0
∈ SU(2), we have
ρm(g0) (fml ) = (−1) lfmm−l
and
ρm(g∗0) (fml ) = (−1) m−lfmm−l
2. The map ρm(g) belongs to both End(Pm) and End(Pm). For if g ∈ SU(2) then
g∈ SU(2), and ρm(g) is a unitary map on Pm. Thus ρm(g) = ρm(g) is a unitary
map on Pm, where Pmis the conjugate space for Pm.
The element 0 1
−1 0
plays a special role in constructing an SU(2)-equivariant
unitary map from Pm onto Pm; we will denote this element by g0.
2. Representations of SU(2) 30
Definition 2.1.5. For m ∈ N, define the endomorphisms
1. Θm : Pm −→ Pm by Θm
(m∑l=0
λlfml
)=
m∑l=0
λl · fml , where · is the multiplication in
Pm.
2. Jm : Pm −→ Pm by Jm = Θmρm(g0).
Proposition 2.1.6. For m ∈ N,
1. Θm is a unitary map that satisfies ρm(g)Θm = Θmρm(g) for any g ∈ SU(2).
2. Jm is an SU(2)-equivariant unitary map from Pm onto Pm.
Proof:
The map Θm takes the orthonormal basis fml : 0 ≤ l ≤ m for Pm to itself; as it
is a basis for Pm, hence Θm is a unitary map. Let g ∈ SU(2), by Remark 2.1.4,
Θm ρm(g)(fml ) = Θm
(alm(ax1 − bx2)l(bx1 + ax2)m−l
)= alm(a · x1 − b.x2)l(b.x1 + a.x2)m−l
= ρm(g) (Θm(fml )) = ρm(g) Θm(fml ).
For the second statement, as Jm is a composition of two unitary maps, it is unitary.
Since
g0g = gg0 ∀g ∈ SU(2)
we have,
Jmρm(g) = Θmρm(g0)ρm(g) = Θmρm(g)ρm(g0)
= ρm(g)Θmρm(g0) = ρm(g)Jm.
2. Representations of SU(2) 31
Remark 2.1.7. For m ∈ N and 0 ≤ l ≤ m, we have:
Jm(fml ) = (−1)lfmm−l, J∗m(fml ) = (−1)m−lfmm−l
where fml is the basis element for Pm.
For m,n ∈ N, we fixed our choice for a basis for Pm ⊗ Pn to be
fml ⊗ fnj : 0 ≤ l ≤ m, 0 ≤ j ≤ n
where writing the basis in this form means that we choose the order to be in the form
fm0 ⊗fn0 , fm1 ⊗fn0 , ...fmm⊗fn0 , fm0 ⊗fn1 , fm1 ⊗fn1 , ......fmm⊗fn1 , ....., fm0 ⊗fnn , fm1 ⊗fnn , .....fmm⊗fnn
In this thesis, we call this basis the standard basis for Pm ⊗ Pn. Recall the flip map
in Definition 1.2.22. By direct computations on the elements of the standard basis
for Pm ⊗ Pn, we obtain
Proposition 2.1.8. For m,n ∈ N, the map
flipPmPn (Jm ⊗ IPn) : Pm ⊗ Pn −→ Pn ⊗ Pm
is an SU(2)-equivariant isomorphism, that satisfies
flipPmPn (Jm ⊗ IPn) = (IPn ⊗ Jm)flipPmPn
2.2 Clebsch-Gordan expansion
For m,n ∈ N, let ρm and ρn be the irreducible representations of SU(2) with cor-
responding SU(2)-spaces Pm and Pn. One can construct a new representation of
SU(2) by taking the tensor product of the two representations, which is not neces-
sarily irreducible. In this section, we build polynomial operators on the SU(2)-space
Pm⊗Pn. To obtain a concrete representation of Pm⊗Pn, let x = (x1, x2), y = (y1, y2),
Pm := Pm(x), and Pn := Pn(y). We embed the tensor product Pm(x) ⊗ Pn(y) into
C[x, y] as follows:
2. Representations of SU(2) 32
Define the map : Pm(x)× Pn(y) −→ C[x, y] by (f(x), g(y)) 7−→ f(x)g(y). It is a
bilinear map, hence extends to a linear T : Pm(x)⊗ Pn(y) −→ C[x, y] taking
f(x)⊗ g(y) to f(x)g(y). Let Pm,n denote the vector space of polynomials in x and y
of bi-degree (m,n) (homogeneous polynomials of degree m in x = (x1, x2) and of
degree n in y = (y1, y2)). The space Pm,n has a basis consisting of
xs1xm−s2 yt1yn−t2 =
1
ams ant
T (fms ⊗ fnt ) : 0 ≤ s ≤ m, 0 ≤ t ≤ n
Since the map T takes a basis for Pm ⊗ Pn to a basis in Pm,n, it is an isomorphism.
Henceforth, we will use Pm,n as a concrete representation of Pm ⊗ Pn.
Remark 2.2.1. Using the identification between Pm⊗Pn and Pm,n above, and Remark
2.1.4, we have
ρm(g)⊗ ρn(g)f(x, y) = f(ax1 − bx2, bx1 + ax2, ay1 − by2, by1 + ay2)
where f(x, y) := f(x1, x2, y1, y2) ∈ Pm ⊗ Pn, and g ∈ SU(2).
Recall that C[x1, x2, y1, y2,∂∂x1, ∂∂x2, ∂∂y1, ∂∂y2
] is a non-commutative algebra of poly-
nomial differential operators which acts on C[x1, x2, y1, y2]. The multiplication is the
composition of operators.
Definition 2.2.2. For m,n ∈ N, define the following maps on Pm ⊗ Pn
∆xy : Pm ⊗ Pn −→ Pm+1 ⊗ Pn−1
f(x, y) 7−→(x1
∂∂y1
+ x2∂∂y2
)f(x, y)
∆yx : Pm ⊗ Pn −→ Pm−1 ⊗ Pn+1
f(x, y) 7−→(y1
∂∂x1
+ y2∂∂x2
)f(x, y)
2. Representations of SU(2) 33
Γxy : Pm ⊗ Pn −→ Pm+1 ⊗ Pn+1
f(x, y) 7−→ (x1y2 − y1x2) f(x, y)
Ωxy : Pm ⊗ Pn −→ Pm−1 ⊗ Pn−1
f(x, y) 7−→(
∂∂x1
∂∂y2− ∂
∂x2
∂∂y1
)f(x, y)
for f(x, y) ∈ Pm ⊗ Pn.
The statement of the next lemma is mentioned in [29, p.47]. The proof is purely
computational, and is provided in Appendix B.
Lemma 2.2.3. The operators ∆xy, ∆yx, Γxy, and Ωxy are SU(2)-equivariant, and
satisfy
∆∗xy = ∆yx, Γ∗xy = Ωxy
Theorem 2.2.4. (Clebsch-Gordan expansion)[29, p.46]. Let m,n ∈ N. For a
polynomial f(x, y) ∈ Pm ⊗ Pn, we have
f(x, y) =
minm,n∑h=0
cm,n,h Γhxy∆n−hyx ∆n−h
xy Ωhxy(f(x, y))
where the coefficients cm,n,h are determined by induction as follows: cm,0,0 = 1. For
n ≥ 1 and 0 ≤ h ≤ minm,n.
cm,n,h =
1
(m+1)ncm+1,n−1,h h=0
1(m+1)n
[cm−1,n−1,h−1 + cm+1,n−1,h] 0<h<n
1(m+1)n
cm−1,n−1,h−1 h=n
2. Representations of SU(2) 34
2.3 An SU(2)-equivariant isometry on the repre-
sentation space of SU(2)
In this section, we use Lemma 2.2.3 and Theorem 2.2.4 to define an SU(2)-equivariant
isometry αm,n,h on the SU(2)-irreducible space Pm+n−2h, where m,n, h ∈ N with
0 ≤ h ≤ minm,n. We also give the matrix coefficients of αm,n,h with respect
to the standard basis for Pm+n−2h.
2.3.1 The isometry αm,n,h
The proof of the next proposition is in [3, p.87].
Proposition 2.3.1. (Clebsch-Gordan decomposition) For m,n ∈ N, let ρm and
ρn be the irreducible representations of SU(2) with corresponding SU(2)-spaces Pm
and Pn. Then
ρm ⊗ ρn =
minm,n⊕h=0
ρm+n−2h
Consequently, the SU(2)-space Pm ⊗ Pn is isomorphic tominm,n⊕h=0
Pm+n−2h.
Definition 2.3.2. For m,n, h ∈ N with 0 ≤ h ≤ min m,n, let
αm,n,h : Pm+n−2h −→ Pm⊗Pn
be the linear map defined by
αm,n,h(f(x1, x2)) =√cm,n,h Γhxy∆
n−hyx (f(x1, x2))
where f(x1, x2) is homogeneous polynomial in x1, x2 of degree m+ n− 2h.
By Lemma 2.2.3, and the fact that a composition of two G-equivariant maps is
G-equivariant, we have:
2. Representations of SU(2) 35
Proposition 2.3.3. For m,n, h ∈ N with 0 ≤ h ≤ minm,n, the map αm,n,h is an
SU(2)-equivariant map.
As a result of Theorem 2.2.4, and Lemma 2.2.3, we get
Lemma 2.3.4. Let m,n, h ∈ N with 0 ≤ h ≤ minm,n.
1. The conjugate map of αm,n,h is given by
α∗m,n,h : Pm ⊗ Pn −→ Pm+n−2h
α∗m,n,h (g(x1, x2, y1, y2)) =√cm,n,h ∆n−h
xy Ωhxy(g(x1, x2, y1, y2))
where g(x1, x2, y1, y2) is a homogeneous polynomial of degree m in x1, x2, and
homogeneous of degree n in y1, y2.
2.minm,n∑h=0
αm,n,hα∗m,n,h = IPm⊗Pn.
Proposition 2.3.5. For m,n, h ∈ N with 0 ≤ h ≤ minm,n, the map αm,n,h is an
isometry.
Proof:
For 0 ≤ h, s ≤ minm,n, the map α∗m,n,hαm,n,s : Pm+n−2s −→ Pm+n−2h is an
SU(2)-equivariant map. By Schur’s Lemma 1.2.12, we have
α∗m,n,hαm,n,s =
0 if h6=s
λIPm+n−2hif h=s
(2.3.1)
for some non-negative integer λ. It remains to show that λ = 1. By Lemma 2.3.4,
the mapminm,n∑
s=0
αm,n,sα∗m,n,s is the identity map on the space Pm⊗Pn. Thus, for any
0 ≤ h ≤ minm,n, we have
α∗m,n,h = α∗m,n,h IPm⊗Pn = α∗m,n,h
minm,n∑s=0
αm,n,sα∗m,n,s =
minm,n∑s=0
α∗m,n,hαm,n,sα∗m,n,s
2. Representations of SU(2) 36
By Equation (2.3.1) above, we get
α∗m,n,h = α∗m,n,hαm,n,hα∗m,n,h = λα∗m,n,h
Since αm,n,h 6= 0 (αm,n,h(xm+n−2h
1 ) 6= 0), and∥∥α∗m,n,h∥∥ = ‖αm,n,h‖, then
α∗m,n,h 6= 0 which gives λ = 1.
Corollary 2.3.6. Let m,n ∈ N. The SU(2)-space
Pm ⊗ Pn =
minm,n⊕h=0
Wm+n−2h
where Wm+n−2h ' Pm+n−2h, 0 ≤ h ≤ minm,n are mutually orthogonal SU(2)-
subspaces, such that Wm+n−2h is the range of the orthogonal projection αm,n,hα∗m,n,h.
This decomposition into SU(2)-irreducible subspaces is unique up to permutation.
Proof:
Let 0 ≤ h ≤ minm,n. By Proposition 2.3.5, the map αm,n,hα∗m,n,h is an
orthogonal projection. Let Wm+n−2h = αm,n,hα∗m,n,h(Pm⊗Pn). By surjectivity of α∗m,n,h,
the equivariance of αm,n,h, and the irreducibility of Pm+n−2h, the subspace Wm+n−2h =
αm,n,h(Pm+n−2h) is an SU(2)-irreducible subspace of Pm ⊗ Pn that is isomorphic to
Pm+n−2h. The mutual orthogonality of the subspaces Wm+n−2h follows by Corollary
1.2.13. Henceminm,n⊕h=0
Wm+n−2h ⊆ Pm ⊗ Pn
By comparing the dimensions, we get the equality Pm ⊗ Pn =minm,n⊕h=0
Wm+n−2h. The
uniqueness follows by Corollary 1.2.16.
A similar result can be stated for the space Pm⊗P n. We need the following
lemma, whose proof is straightforward using Proposition 2.1.6. Recall that P n is an
SU(2)-irreducible space under the contragredient representation ρn.
2. Representations of SU(2) 37
Lemma 2.3.7. Let m,n ∈ N.
1. The map IPm ⊗ Jn : Pm ⊗ Pn −→ Pm ⊗ P n is an SU(2)-equivariant unitary
isomorphism whose inverse is IPm ⊗ J∗n .
2. The map ηm,n,h = (IPm ⊗ Jn)αm,n,h is an SU(2)-equivariant isometry from
Pm+n−2h into Pm ⊗ P n.
Corollary 2.3.8. Let m,n ∈ N. The SU(2)-space
Pm ⊗ P n =
minm,n⊕h=0
Vm+n−2h
where Vm+n−2h ' Pm+n−2h, 0 ≤ h ≤ minm,n are mutually orthogonal SU(2)-
subspaces, such that Vm+n−2h is the range of the orthogonal projection ηm,n,hη∗m,n,h.
This decomposition into SU(2)-irreducible subspaces is unique up to permutation.
2.3.2 The matrix coefficients of αm,n,h
In this section, we give the matrix coefficients of the isometry αm,n,h with respect
to the standard basis for Pm+n−2h. The proof of Lemma 2.3.11 below is a direct
computation, and is deferred to Appendix B. To simplify our notation, we state the
following definition.
Definition 2.3.9. For a subset A of a space X, the indicator function χA : X −→
0, 1 is defined by
χA(x) =
1 if x ∈ A
0 if x /∈ A
For the rest of the thesis, we will systematically use the following notation without
further mention. For quick reference, Appendix C contains the list of notation and
equation that are used in the thesis.
Notation 2.3.10. For m,n, h, i, j ∈ N with 0 ≤ h ≤ minm,n, 0 ≤ i ≤ m+n−2h,
and 0 ≤ j ≤ n, we define
2. Representations of SU(2) 38
• B(i) := j : max0,−m+ i+ h ≤ j ≤ mini+ h, n.
• lij := i− j + h.
Lemma 2.3.11. Let m,n, h ∈ N with 0 ≤ h ≤ minm,n, and r = m + n − 2h.
Then
1. αm,n,h (f ri ) =h∑s=0
mini+s, n−h+s∑j=maxs,−m+i+h+s
βm,n,hi,s,j fmlij ⊗ fnj
2. α∗m,n,h(fml ⊗ fnj
)=
(minh,j,m−l∑
s=max0,h−l,h+j−nβm,n,hl+j−h,s,j
)f rl+j−h · χ[0,r](l+j−h)
where
βm,n,hi,s,j = (−1)s(hs
)(n−hj−s
)(m−hi−j+s
)(m−h)!
√cm,n,hr! m! n!
(ri) ( mi−j+h) (nj)
and fkt : 0 ≤ t ≤ k is the standard basis for Pk, where k ∈ m,n, r.
Remark 2.3.12. The vectors fmlij and f rl+j−h, in Lemma 2.3.11, are indeed elements
of the basis for Pm, and Pr respectively. This follows since
maxs,−m+ i+ h+ s ≤ j ≤ mini+ s, n− h+ s
implies
0 ≤ max0, i− n+ h ≤ lij ≤ min i+ h,m ≤ m
and the summinh,j,m−l∑
s=max0,h−l,h+j−nβm,n,hl+j−h,s,j is nonempty if and only if
max0, h− l, h+ j − n ≤ minh, j,m− l
which implies 0 ≤ l + j − h ≤ r.
The following corollary gives more compact forms of the formulae in Lemma
2.3.11.
2. Representations of SU(2) 39
Corollary 2.3.13. For m,n, h ∈ N with 0 ≤ h ≤ minm,n, let r = m + n − 2h.
The values of the maps αm,n,h and α∗m,n,h on the elements of the standard bases for
Pr and Pm ⊗ Pn are given by
αm,n,h (f ri ) =∑j∈B(i)
εji (m,n,h) fmlij ⊗ fn
j
and
α∗m,n,h(fml ⊗ fnj
)= εjl+j−h(m,n,h)f rl+j−h · χ[0,r](l+j−h)
where εjt (m,n,h) =minh,j,j+m−t−h∑s=max0,j−t,j+h−n
βm,n,ht,s,j .
Proof:
For the first equality, let
A = (s, j) : 0 ≤ s ≤ h, maxs,−m+ i+ h+ s ≤ j ≤ mini + s, n − h + s, and
Aj = s : (s, j) ∈ A then
A = ∪j(s, j) : s ∈ Aj
where the index j ranges from max0,−m+ i+ h at s = 0 to mini + h, n at
s = h.
i.e
Aj = s : (s, j) ∈ A = s : 0 ≤ s ≤ h, j −mini, n− h ≤ s ≤ j −max0,−m+ i+ h
= s : max0, j −mini, n− h ≤ s ≤ minh, j −max0,−m+ i+ h
= s : max0, j − i, j + h− n ≤ s ≤ minh, j, j +m− i− h
By Lemma 2.3.11, we have
αm,n,h(fr
i ) =∑
(s,j)∈A
βm,n,hi,s,j fmlij ⊗ f
n
j =
mini+h, n∑j=max0,−m+i+h
∑s∈Aj
βm,n,hi,s,j fmlij ⊗ f
n
j
=
mini+h, n∑j=max0,−m+i+h
minh,j,j+m−i−h∑s=max0,j−i,j+h−n
βm,n,hi,s,j fmlij ⊗ f
n
j =∑j∈B(i)
εji (m,n,h) fmlij ⊗ fn
j .
2. Representations of SU(2) 40
The second equality follows by Lemma 2.3.11.
For the rest of the thesis, when m,n, h are clear from context, we will abbreviate
εji (m,n,h) to εji .
Remarks 2.3.14. Let m,n, h ∈ N, with 0 ≤ h ≤ minm,n, and r = m+ n− 2h.
1. For 0 ≤ i ≤ r, we have
(a) The set B(i) is non-empty, as max0,−m+ i+ h ≤ mini+ h, n.
(b) B(r − i) = n−B(i).
2. If Bm,n,h(i) denotes the set B(i) associated to αm,n,h, and Bn,m,h(i) denotes the
set B(i) associated to αn,m,h, then
j ∈ Bm,n,h(i) if and only if lij ∈ Bn,m,h(i)
3. The map αm,n,h can be written as
αm,n,h =r∑i=0
∑j∈B(i)
εji
(fmlij ⊗ f
n
j
)f r∗
i
4. The map ηm,n,h in Lemma 2.3.7 is given on the basis elements for Pr by
ηm,n,h (f ri ) =∑j∈B(i)
(−1)jεji (m,n,h) fmlij ⊗ fn
n−j
The following corollary, whose proof is in Appendix B, contains basic relations
for the coefficients εji .
Corollary 2.3.15. For m,n, h ∈ N with 0 ≤ h ≤ minm,n, let r = m + n − 2h.
The matrix coefficients εji := εji (m,n,h) of the isometry αm,n,h satisfy
1. εji = (−1)hεn−jr−i for 0 ≤ i ≤ r and j ∈ B(i).
2. Representations of SU(2) 41
2. εi+hi = βm,n,hi,h,h+i for i ≤ n− h.
3. εni = βm,n,hi,h,n = (−1)h∣∣∣βm,n,hi,h,n
∣∣∣ 6= 0 for n− h ≤ i ≤ r.
4. εj0 = βm,n,h0,j,j = (−1)j
∣∣∣βm,n,h0,j,j
∣∣∣ 6= 0 for j ∈ B(0).
5. ε0i = βm,n,hi,0,0 6= 0 for 0 ≤ i ≤ m− h.
6. εji (m,n,n) = βm,n,ni,j,j , and εji (m,n,0) = βm,n,0i,0,j .
Corollary 2.3.16. Let m,n, h ∈ N with 0 ≤ h ≤ minm,n, and r = m+ n− 2h.
1. The coefficient cm,n,h in the Clebsch-Gordan expansion (Theorem 2.2.4), is given
by
cm,n,h =((m−h)!)2
r! m! n!
(h∑k=0
(hk
)2
( mh−k) (nk)
)Consequently,
βm,n,hi,s,j =(−1)s
(hs
) (n−hj−s
) (m−hi−j+s
)√√√√(ri
) (m
i−j+h
) (nj
)( h∑k=0
(hk
)2
( mh−k) (nk)
)
2. For 0 ≤ i ≤ r , and j ∈ B(i), we have
εji (m,n,h) = (−1)hεliji (n,m,h)
Proof:
By Corollary 2.3.13, we have αm,n,h(fr0 ) =
h∑j=0
βm,n,h0,j,j fml0j ⊗ fnj . Since
fml0j ⊗ f
nj
are orthonormal set, and αm,n,h is isometry, then 1 =
h∑j=0
(βm,n,h0,j,j
)2
. As
βm,n,h0,j,j = (−1)j√cm,n,h
(hj
)(m−h)!
√r! m! n!
( mh−j) (nj)
,
2. Representations of SU(2) 42
the first statement follows. For the second one, by using the formula for εji in Corollary
2.3.13, we have
εliji (n,m,h) =
minh,lij ,lij−i−h+n∑t=max0,lij−i,lij+h−m
βn,m,hi,t,lij=
minh,i−j+h,n−j∑t=max0,h−j,i+2h−j−m
βn,m,hi,t,lij
By Remarks 2.3.14 (2), and since βn,m,hi,h−s,lij = (−1)hβm,n,hi,s,j for any 0 ≤ s ≤ h, we have
εliji (n,m,h) =
minh,i−j+h,n−j∑t=max0,h−j,i+2h−j−m
βn,m,hi,t,lij=
minh,j,j−i+m−h∑s=max0,j−i,j+h−n
βn,m,hi,h−s,lij
=
minh,j,j−i+m−h∑s=max0,j−i,j+h−n
(−1)hβm,n,hi,s,j = (−1)
hεji (m,n,h).
2.4 An application: The algebra End(Pm) as a di-
rect sum of orthogonal SU(2)-subspaces
In this section, following [29, p.580], we express the algebra End(Pm) as a direct sum
of mutually orthogonal SU(2)-subspaces, and find explicit formulae for the projec-
tions on these subspaces. We also give a general method to decompose a matrix
A ∈ End(Pm) into an orthogonal direct sum of matrices, and compute the first two
matrices in this decomposition.
The following proposition is a direct result of Corollary 1.2.16, Lemma 1.2.25,
and Corollary 2.3.8.
Proposition 2.4.1. Let m ∈ N. The algebra End(Pm) can be written uniquely as an
orthogonal direct sum of SU(2)-irreducible subspaces. i.e.
End(Pm) =m⊕t=0
U2t
2. Representations of SU(2) 43
where U2t : 0 ≤ t ≤ m is a set of SU(2)-irreducible subspaces each of them is iso-
morphic to P2t for some 0 ≤ t ≤ m.
The next proposition gives formulae for the projections of End(Pm) onto the sub-
spaces U2t : 0 ≤ t ≤ m. Recall that by Corollary 2.3.8, the map ηm,m,m−tη∗m,m,m−t
is the projection of Pm⊗Pm onto the SU(2)-invariant subspace that is isomorphic to
P2t.
Proposition 2.4.2. Let m ∈ N, andm⊕t=0
U2t be the decomposition of End(Pm) into a
direct sum of SU(2)-irreducible subspaces. For each 0 ≤ t ≤ m, the map
Vec∗ηm,m,m−tη∗m,m,m−tVec
is the SU(2)-equivariant orthogonal projection of End(Pm) onto U2t.
Proof:
By Lemma 1.2.25, and Lemma 2.3.7, the map
Vec∗ηm,m,m−tη∗m,m,m−tVec : End(Pm) −→ Pm ⊗ Pm −→ End(Pm)
is an SU(2)-equivariant orthogonal projection. Since the map Vec is unitary SU(2)-
equivariant, and the space
Pm ⊗ Pm =m⊕t=0
V2t
with V2t = ηm,m,m−tη∗m,m,m−t(Pm⊗Pm) ' P2t (Corollary 2.3.8), then Vec∗ηm,m,m−tη
∗m,m,m−tVec
is a projection onto a subspace isomorphic to P2t. The result follows by the unique-
ness of the decomposition of End(Pm).
Corollary 2.4.3. Let m ∈ N, and A ∈ End(Pm). The matrix of A can be decomposed
into a direct sum of mutually orthogonal matrices (A0, A2, .....A2m), where
A2t = Vec∗ηm,m,m−tη∗m,m,m−tVec(A).
2. Representations of SU(2) 44
Namely,
A =m∑t=0
A2t where A2t ∈ U2t, and End(Pm) =m⊕t=0
U2t.
In the rest of this section, we find a general formula to compute the decompo-
sition of a matrix A ∈ End(Pm) into a direct sum of mutually orthogonal matrices
A2t, 0 ≤ t ≤ m . By Corollary 2.4.3, A2t is obtained by applying the two following
steps :
1. Computing the vectors v2t = η∗m,m,m−tVec(A) ∈ P2t for each 0 ≤ t ≤ m.
2. Computing the mutually orthogonal matrices A2t := Av2t = Vec∗ηm,m,m−t(v2t).
For a better explanation of this idea, we find the decomposition for a general
matrix A ∈ End(P1). Recall that ηm,m,m−t = (IPm ⊗ Jm)αm,m,m−t, and that by
Remark 2.1.7, we have Jm(fml ) = (−1)lfmm−l, J∗m(fml ) = (−1)m−lfmm−l
Example 2.4.4. Let A =
a11 a12
a21 a22
∈ End(P1). The matrix A is decomposed
into (A0, A2) where
A0 =
a11+a22
20
0 a11+a22
2
and A2 =
a11−a22
2a12
a21a22−a11
2
Since
〈A0 |A2 〉End(P1) = tr(A∗0A2) = 0
then A0 and A2 are mutually orthogonal.
2. Representations of SU(2) 45
Proof:
Fix the basis for End(P1) in the following order f 10 f
1∗0 , f
11 f
1∗0 , f
10 f
1∗1 , f
11 f
1∗1 . Let
A =1∑
i,j=0
a(i+1)(j+1)(f1i f
1∗j ). By Corollary 2.4.3, for any t ∈ 0, 1, we have
A2t =1∑
i,j=0
a(i+1)(j+1)Vec∗η1,1,1−tη∗1,1,1−tVec(f 1
i f1∗
j ).
• Case t = 0:
Let εji := εji (1,1,1). Using Corollary 2.3.13, and Remark 2.1.7, we have:
η∗1,1,1Vec(f 1
i f1∗
j ) = η∗1,1,1(f 1
i ⊗ f 1
j ) = α∗1,1,1(IP1 ⊗ J∗1 )(f 1
i ⊗ f 1
j )
= α∗1,1,1(f 1
i ⊗ (−1)1−jf 1
1−j) = (−1)1−jε1−ji−j f
0
i−jδij
= (−1)1−jε1−j1 δijf
0
0
but
Vec∗η1,1,1(f 0
0 ) = Vec∗(IP1 ⊗ J1)α1,1,1(f 0
0 )
= Vec∗(IP1 ⊗ J1)(1∑
s=0
εs0f1
1−s ⊗ f 1
s )
= Vec∗(1∑
s=0
(−1)sεs0f1
1−s ⊗ f 1
1−s)
=1∑
s=0
(−1)sεs0f1
1−sf1∗1−s = ε0
0f1
1 f1∗
1 − ε1
0f1
0 f1∗
0 ;
then,
Vec∗η1,1,1η∗1,1,1Vec(f 1
i f1∗
j ) = (−1)1−jε1−j1 δijVec∗η1,1,1(f 0
0 )
= (−1)1−jε1−j1 δij(ε
0
0f1
1 f1∗
1 − ε1
0f1
0 f1∗
0 )
= (−1)1−jε1−j1 δij(
1√2f 1
1 f1∗
1 + 1√2f 1
0 f1∗
0 ).
2. Representations of SU(2) 46
Hence,
A0 = Vec∗η1,1,1η∗1,1,1Vec(A) = ( 1√
2f 1
1 f1∗
1 + 1√2f 1
0 f1∗
0 )1∑
i,j=0
a(i+1)(j+1)(−1)1−jε1−j1 δij
= ( 1√2f 1
1 f1∗
1 + 1√2f 1
0 f1∗
0 )(−ε1
0a11 + ε0
0a22)
= ( 1√2f 1
1 f1∗
1 + 1√2f 1
0 f1∗
0 )( 1√2a11 + 1√
2a22)
= a11+a22
2I2.
• Case t = 1 :
Let εji := εji (1,1,0), using Corollary 2.3.13, and Remark 2.1.7, we have
η∗1,1,0Vec(f 1
i f1∗
j ) = η∗1,1,0(f 1
i ⊗ f 1
j ) = α∗1,1,0(IP1 ⊗ J∗1 )(f 1
i ⊗ f 1
j )
= α∗1,1,0(f 1
i ⊗ (−1)1−jf 1
1−j)
= (−1)1−jε1−ji−j+1f
2
i−j+1 · χ[−1,1](i−j+1)
so
η∗1,1,0Vec(f 1
0 f1∗
0 ) = −ε1
1f2
1 , η∗1,1,0Vec(f 1
0 f1∗
1 ) = ε0
0f2
0
and
η∗1,1,0Vec(f 1
1 f1∗
0 ) = −ε1
2f2
2 , η∗1,1,0Vec(f 1
1 f1∗
1 ) = ε0
1f2
1 .
As for 0 ≤ l ≤ 2,
Vec∗η1,1,0(f 2
l ) = Vec∗(IP1 ⊗ J1)α1,1,0(f 2
l ) = Vec∗(IP1 ⊗ J1)(
minl,1∑s=max0,l−1
εsl f1
l−s ⊗ f 1
s )
= Vec∗(
minl,1∑s=max0,l−1
(−1)sεsl f1
l−s ⊗ f 1
1−s) =
minl,1∑s=max0,l−1
(−1)sεsl f1
l−sf1∗
1−s
and
ε00 = 1 = ε1
2, and ε01 = 1√
2= ε1
1,
we have:
2. Representations of SU(2) 47
1. Vec∗η1,1,0η∗1,1,0Vec(f 1
0 f1∗0 )= (ε1
1)2 f 1
0 f1∗0 − ε0
1ε11f
11 f
1∗1 = 1
2f 1
0 f1∗0 − 1
2f 1
1 f1∗1 .
2. Vec∗η1,1,0η∗1,1,0Vec(f 1
0 f1∗1 )= (ε0
0)2 f 1
0 f1∗1 = f 1
0 f1∗1 .
3. Vec∗η1,1,0η∗1,1,0Vec(f 1
1 f1∗0 )= (ε1
2)2 f 1
1 f1∗0 = f 1
1 f1∗0 .
4. Vec∗η1,1,0η∗1,1,0Vec(f 1
1 f1∗1 )= (ε0
1)2 f 1
1 f1∗1 − ε0
1ε11f
10 f
1∗0 = 1
2f 1
1 f1∗1 − 1
2f 1
0 f1∗0 .
Thus
A2 = a11(12f 1
0 f1∗0 − 1
2f 1
1 f1∗1 ) + a21f
11 f
1∗0 + a12f
10 f
1∗1 + a22
(12f 1
1 f1∗1 − 1
2f 1
0 f1∗0
)=
a11−a22
2a12
a21a22−a11
2
.
The same idea in the example above is used to find the decomposition of any
matrix A in End(Pm) for m ∈ N. By linearity, it is enough to compute the decom-
position of fmi1 fm∗i2
, the basis element for End(Pm). This decomposition is given in
Corollary 2.4.8 below. We begin with the following lemmas which generalize the steps
in the example above.
Lemma 2.4.5. Let m ∈ N, and fmi1 fm∗i2
be an element of the standard basis of
End(Pm). Then
fmi1 fm∗
i2= (ϕt(v2t))0≤t≤m
where
• ϕt : P2t −→ U2t, given by ϕt = V ec∗ηm,m,m−t, and
• v2t = (−1)m−i2εm−i2i1−i2+t(m,m,m−t)f2ti1−i2+t · χ[−t,t](i1−i2)
2. Representations of SU(2) 48
Proof:
By Corollary 2.4.3,
fmi1 fm∗
i2=(V ec∗ηm,m,m−tη
∗m,m,m−tV ec(f
m
i1fm∗
i2))
0≤t≤m
Let v2t = η∗m,m,m−tVec(fmi1 fm∗i2
) ∈ P2t. Since η∗m,m,m−t = α∗m,m,m−t (IPm ⊗ J∗m), then by
Corollary 2.3.13, and Remark 2.1.7, we have
v2t = (−1)m−i2εm−i2i1−i2+t(m,m,m−t)f2t
i1−i2+t · χ[−t,t](i1−i2)
The result now follows.
Lemma 2.4.6. Let m ∈ N and 0 ≤ t ≤ m. Let ψt : P2t −→ U2t be the map
ψt = V ec∗ηm,m,m−t. For each i such that 0 ≤ i ≤ 2t, we have
ψt(f2t
i ) =
mini+m−t,m∑j=max0,i−t
(−1)jεji (m,m,m−t)fmi+(m−j)−tfm∗
m−j
Proof:
By Remarks 2.3.14 (4),
ηm,m,m−t(f2t
i ) =
mini+m−t,m∑j=max0,i−t
(−1)jεji (m,m,m−t)fmi+(m−j)−t ⊗ fmm−j
so
ψt(f2t
i ) = V ec∗ηm,m,m−t(f2t
i ) =
mini+m−t,m∑j=max0,i−t
(−1)jεji (m,m,m−t)fmi+(m−j)−tfm∗
m−j
Remark 2.4.7. If in the last lemma i = t, then the matrix ψt(f2tt ) will be a diagonal
matrix given bym∑j=0
(−1)jεjt (m,m,m−t)fmm−jfm∗
m−j
2. Representations of SU(2) 49
Corollary 2.4.8. Let m ∈ N. For 0 ≤ i1, i2 ≤ m, we have
fmi1 fm∗
i2=(C2t(f
m
i1fm∗
i2))
0≤t≤m
whereC2t(f
mi1fm∗
i2), 0 ≤ t ≤ m
is a set of mutually orthogonal matrices given by
[minm+i1−i2,m∑j=max0,i1−i2
(−1)m−i2+jεm−i2i1−i2+t(m,m,m−t)εj
i1−i2+t(m,m,m−t)fm
i1−i2+(m−j)fm∗
m−j
]· χ[−t,t](i1−i2)
In particular,
fmi fm∗
i =
(m∑j=0
(−1)m−i+jεm−it (m,m,m−t)εjt (m,m,m−t)fmm−jfm∗
m−j
)0≤t≤m
Proof:
For any s, let εsi1−i2+t := εsi1−i2+t(m,m,m−t). By Lemma 2.4.5, and Lemma 2.4.6, we
have
fmi1 fm∗
i2=(C2t(f
mi1fm∗
i2))
0≤t≤m
where C2t(fmi1fm∗
i2)= V ec∗ηm,m,m−t(v2t) is a matrix corresponds to a unique vector
v2t = (−1)m−i2εm−i2i1−i2+tf2t
i1−i2+t · χ[−t,t](i1−i2)
Applying the formula in Remark 2.3.14 (4), we get
C2t(fm
i1fm∗
i2) =
[(−1)m−i2εm−i2i1−i2+tV ec
∗ηm,m,m−t(f2t
i1−i2+t)]· χ[−t,t](i1−i2)
=
[minm+i1−i2,m∑j=max0,i1−i2
(−1)m−i2+jεm−i2i1−i2+tεj
i1−i2+tfm
i1−i2+(m−j)fm∗
m−j
]· χ[−t,t](i1−i2)
2. Representations of SU(2) 50
Example 2.4.9. Let m ∈ N, and A ∈ End(Pm). If (A2t)0≤t≤m is the decomposition
of A into mutually orthogonal matrices, then
A0 = tr(A)m+1
IPm
Proof:
Let A =m∑
i1,i2=0
a(i1+1)(i2+1)fmi1fm∗
i2. Using Corollary 2.4.3, we have
A0 = Vec∗ηm,m,mη∗m,m,mVec(A) =
m∑i1,i2=0
a(i1+1)(i2+1)Vec∗ηm,m,mη∗m,m,mVec(fmi1 f
m∗
i2)
=m∑
i1,i2=0
a(i1+1)(i2+1)C0(fmi1 fm∗
i2)
By Corollary 2.4.8, for 0 ≤ i1, i2 ≤ m, we have
C0(fmi1 fm∗
i2) =
[m∑j=0
(−1)m−i2+jεm−i20 (m,m,m)εj0(m,m,m)fmm−jfm∗
m−j
]· δi1i2
thus
A0 =m∑i=0
a(i+1)(i+1)
(m∑j=0
(−1)m−i+jεm−i0 (m,m,m)εj0(m,m,m)fmm−jfm∗
m−j
)as
εm−i0 (m,m,m) = (−1)m−i 1√
m+1, and εj0(m,m,m) = (−1)j
1√m+1
, we have
A0 =m∑i=0
a(i+1)(i+1)
(m∑j=0
1m+1
fmm−jfm∗
m−j
)= 1
m+1tr(A)IPm .
Corollary 2.4.10. Let m ∈ N, A ∈ End(Pm), and (A2t)0≤t≤m is the decomposition
of A into mutually orthogonal matrices. If tr(A) 6= 0, then for each 1 ≤ t ≤ m
tr(A2t) = 0
2. Representations of SU(2) 51
To continue in finding formulae for A2t, 0 < t ≤ m, we apply the same algo-
rithm in the example above. Due to the complicated computations that are needed
to find C2t(fmi1fm∗
i2) for general t, we only compute the matrix A2 (at t = 1) in the
decomposition of A. Before doing so, we need a computational lemma whose proof is
in Appendix B.
Lemma 2.4.11. Let m ∈ Nr0, and εji := εji (m,m,m−1). The following identities hold
1. εj0 = (−1)j
√6(j+1)(m−j)m(m+1)(m+2)
for 0 ≤ j ≤ m− 1.
2. εj1 = (−1)j√
3m(m+1)(m+2)
(m− 2j) for 0 ≤ j ≤ m.
3. εj2 = (−1)j−1
√6j(m−j+1)
m(m+1)(m+2)for 1 ≤ j ≤ m.
The following proposition is a direct result of Corollary 2.4.8, and Lemma 2.4.11.
Note that if fmi1 fm∗i2
/∈ fmi fm∗
i , fmi fm∗i+1, f
mi+1f
m∗i , then |i1 − i2| > 1 and C2(fmi1 f
m∗i2
) will
be a zero matrix.
Proposition 2.4.12. Let m ∈ N. Then
1. C2(fmi fm∗i ) = −3(m−2i)
m(m+1)(m+2)
m∑j=0
(m− 2j)fmm−jfm∗m−j, for 0 ≤ i ≤ m.
2. C2(fmi fm∗i+1) =
6√
(i+1)(m−i)m(m+1)(m+2)
m−1∑j=0
√(j + 1)(m− j)fmm−j−1f
m∗m−j, for 0 ≤ i ≤ m− 1.
3. C2(fmi+1fm∗i ) =
6√
(i+1)(m−i)m(m+1)(m+2)
m∑j=1
√j(m− j + 1)fmm−j+1f
m∗m−j, for 0 ≤ i ≤ m− 1.
4. C2(fmi1 fm∗i2
) is a zero matrix for any fmi1 fm∗i2
/∈ fmi fm∗
i , fmi fm∗i+1, f
mi+1f
m∗i .
2. Representations of SU(2) 52
Example 2.4.13. Let m ∈ N and, A =m∑
i1,i2=0
a(i1+1)(i2+1)fmi1fm∗
i2∈ End(Pm). Let
(A2t)0≤t≤m be the decomposition of A into mutually orthogonal matrices as in Corol-
lary 2.4.3. Then
A2 = (bkj)1≤k,l≤m+1
where
• bjj = 3(m−2j+2)m(m+2)(m+1)
m+1∑i=1
aii(m− 2i+ 2), for 1 ≤ j ≤ m+ 1.
• bj,j+1 =6√j(m−j+1)
m(m+1)(m+2)
m+1∑i=1
ai,i+1
√i(m− i+ 1), and
bj+1,j =6√j(m−j+1)
m(m+1)(m+2)
m+1∑i=1
ai+1,i
√i(m− i+ 1) for 1 ≤ j ≤ m.
• bkj = 0 elsewhere.
i.e. A2 has the form
b11 b12 0 0 0. . . 0
b12 b22 b23 0 0. . . 0
0 b32 b33 b34 0. . . 0
0 0 b43 b44 b45. . . 0
0 0 0 b54 b55. . . 0
......
......
. . . . . . bm,m+1
0 0 0 0 0 bm+1,m bm+1,m+1
where bjj, bj,j+1, bj+1,j are given above.
Proof:
By Corollary 2.4.3, the matrix
A2 =m∑
i1,i2=0
a(i1+1)(i2+1)Vec∗ηm,m,m−1η∗m,m,m−1Vec(fmi1 f
m∗
i2) =
m∑i1,i2=0
a(i1+1)(i2+1)C2(fmi1 fm∗
i2)
2. Representations of SU(2) 53
As in Proposition 2.4.12 (4),
C2(fmi1 fm∗i2
) = 0 for fmi1 fm∗i2
/∈ fmi fm∗
i , fmi fm∗i+1, f
mi+1f
m∗i ,
we have
A2 =m∑i=0
ai+1,i+1C2(fmi fm∗
i ) +m−1∑i=0
ai+1,i+2C2(fmi fm∗
i+1) +m−1∑i=0
ai+2,i+1C2(fmi+1fm∗
i )
Using Proposition 2.4.12 (1,2,3), we get:
A2 =m+1∑j=1
(m+1∑i=1
aii3(m−2j+2)(m−2i+2)
m(m+1)(m+2)
)fmj−1f
m∗j−1+
m∑j=1
(m∑i=1
ai,i+16√i(m−i+1)
√j(m−j+1)
m(m+1)(m+2)
)fmj−1f
m∗j
+m∑j=1
(m∑i=1
ai+1,i6√i(m−i+1)
√j(m−j+1)
m(m+1)(m+2)
)fmj f
m∗j−1.
Remark 2.4.14. Sincem+1∑j=1
(m− 2j + 2) = 0, then
tr(A2) =m+1∑j=1
(m+1∑i=1
aii3(m−2j+2)(m−2i+2)
m(m+1)(m+2)
)=
m+1∑i=1
aii(m−2i+2)
m(m+1)(m+2)
m+1∑j=1
(m− 2j + 2) = 0
which is compatible with Corollary 2.4.10.
Chapter 3
Introduction to Quantum Channels
This chapter contains the required definitions and propositions from both operator al-
gebra and the quantum information theory needed to model our examples of quantum
channels. Most of this preliminary information is taken from [16], [27], and [41].
3.1 Positive and completely positive maps
Definition 3.1.1. Let H and K be Hilbert spaces. A linear map Φ : End(H) −→
End(K) is said to be
• positive if Φ(A) ≥ 0 for any positive matrix A ∈ End(H).
• n-positive if Φ⊗ In is positive, where
Φ⊗ In : End(H)⊗Mn (C) −→ End(K)⊗Mn (C)
is the linear map, such that
Φ⊗ In (A⊗B) = Φ(A)⊗B
for A ∈ End(H) and B ∈Mn(C).
• completely positive if it is n-positive for all n ≥ 1.
54
3. Introduction to Quantum Channels 55
It follows from the definition that any completely positive map is positive; how-
ever the converse is not true. The following contains an example of a positive map
that is not completely positive.
Examples 3.1.2.
1. Let H be a Hilbert space. The identity map IEnd(H) : End(H) −→ End(H) is
completely positive.
2. Any ∗−homomorphism is completely positive.
3. The transpose map T : Mn (C) −→Mn (C) defined by taking A 7−→ At,
is an example of a positive map that is not completely positive [28, p.5].
For the proof of the following proposition, see Proposition A.2.3 in Appendix A.
Proposition 3.1.3. Let H and K be Hilbert spaces, and let Φ : End(H) −→ End(K)
be a linear map. If Φ is n-positive, then it is k-positive for all 1 ≤ k ≤ n.
Theorem 3.1.4. [28, p.35]. Let K be a Hilbert space, and n ∈ N. A linear map
Φ : Mn (C) −→ End(K) is completely positive if and only if it is n-positive.
The next theorem, known as the Choi theorem [5, 28, p.35], shows that the
complete positivity of Φ is reflected in its Choi matrix (Lemma 1.2.30).
Theorem 3.1.5. Let H and K be Hilbert spaces. A linear map Φ : End(H) −→
End(K) is completely positive if and only if C(Φ) is a positive element in End(K⊗H).
Definition 3.1.6. Let H and K be Hilbert spaces. A linear map Φ : End(H) −→
End(K) is said to be trace-preserving if tr(Φ(A)) = tr(A) for any A ∈ End(H),
where tr denotes the unnormalized trace on End(H).
3. Introduction to Quantum Channels 56
3.2 Quantum channels
3.2.1 Quantum systems and quantum states
A quantum system is pair consisting of the arena, where the operations take
place and where the data can be stored, and a state describing this arena known as a
quantum state [27, p.80]. Such a quantum system is represented mathematically by a
complex Hilbert space known as the state space, and a density operator on H known
as the state of H. A formal definition of state is the following:
Definition 3.2.1. Let H be a Hilbert space.
1. A state of H is a density operator % ∈ End(H), i.e, a positive operator in
End(H) that has trace one.
2. A state that is a rank one projection is called a pure state. An impure state is
called a mixed state.
3. The maximally mixed state of H is the state 1dHIH.
The set of all states of H is denoted by D(H), and P(H) denotes the subset of
all pure states of H.
Remark 3.2.2. In operator algebras, the state has a different definition correspond-
ing to the one above, see [10, Ch.6 (6.3 and 6.7)],
Example 3.2.3. The simplest quantum system has a two-dimensional state space.
It is called the qubit, and represented mathematically by C2. The state e1e∗1 =
1 0
0 0
is an example of a pure state of C2. An impure state of C2 is 1
2
1 0
0 1
.
Remarks 3.2.4.
3. Introduction to Quantum Channels 57
1. The state % ∈ D(H) is pure if and only if % can be written in the form ww∗ for
some unit vector w in H. The fact that w is a unit vector corresponds to the
condition tr(%) = 1 (1 = tr(ww∗) = ‖w‖2).
2. As proved in Section 3.1.2 in [41, p.29], the set of quantum states of a finite-
dimensional Hilbert space H is a compact convex set whose extreme points are
the pure states.
A quantum system that is made up of two or more other quantum systems is
called a composite system. The state space of a composite system is the tensor product
of the state spaces of the components, and the joint state of the total system is the
tensor product of the states of the component [27, p.102]. That is, if %i ∈ D(Hi)
for each 1 ≤ i ≤ m, then %1 ⊗ %2 ⊗ .... ⊗ %m ∈ D(H1 ⊗ H2 ⊗ ... ⊗ Hm). The state
%1 ⊗ %2 ⊗ .... ⊗ %m represents the case where the quantum systems Hi are mutually
independent. If the state of H1 ⊗ H2 ⊗ ... ⊗ Hm can not be expressed as a product
state, then Hi are called correlated.
Definition 3.2.5. Let Hi, 1 ≤ i ≤ m be Hilbert spaces, and %i ∈ D(Hi).
1. The state %1 ⊗ %2 ⊗ .... ⊗ %m is called a product state of the composite system
H1 ⊗H2 ⊗ ...⊗Hm.
2. A separable state is a convex combination of product states of H1⊗H2⊗...⊗Hm.
3. A non-separable state is called an entangled state. A composite system that has
an entangled state is called an entangled system.
Definition 3.2.6. A bipartite quantum system is a composite system that consists
of two quantum systems. A state on bipartite system is called a bipartite state. If
% is a state of H1 ⊗ H2, then %H1 = TrH2(%) and %H2 = TrH1
(%) are states of the
subsystems H1 and H2 respectively. The states %H1 and %H2 are called the reduced
density operators of %.
3. Introduction to Quantum Channels 58
Example 3.2.7.
The state 12
1 0 0 1
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
1 0 0 1
= ww∗ where w = 1√2(e1⊗e1 +e2⊗e2) is an example of
a pure entangled state on the composite system C2 ⊗ C2. This is called a Bell state.
Definition 3.2.8. Let (H, πH) be a representation of a group G. A G-equivariant
state of H is a state of H which is a G-equivariant map.
If D(H)G denotes the G-equivariant states of H, then
D(H)G = End(H)G ∩D(H)
Example 3.2.9. [40] Let H be Hilbert space of dimension n. Let G = U ⊗ U :
U ∈ U(n) where U(n) is the set of all unitary operators on H. A Werner state is
an n× n-dimensional bipartite quantum state that is G-equivariant.
3.2.2 Quantum channels, definition and examples
Sending information from one quantum system to another requires transforma-
tions of the states. In quantum mechanics, a quantum channel (a channel) is defined
to be any method that is used to transfer states between two quantum systems. A
mathematical definition of the quantum channel is the following:
Definition 3.2.10. Let H and K be Hilbert spaces. A quantum channel Φ : End(H) −→
End(K) is a linear completely positive trace-preserving map.
We denote the set of all quantum channels from End(H) toEnd(K) byQC(H,K).
The requirement that Φ is completely positive is justified in the introduction of [19].
Examples 3.2.11. Let H be a Hilbert space.
3. Introduction to Quantum Channels 59
1. For a unitary operator U on H, the map Φ : End(H) −→ End(H) defined by
Φ(A) = UAU∗ for any A ∈ End(H) is a quantum channel. Such a channel
is called a unitary conjugation channel or briefly a unitary channel. A convex
combination of unitary channels on H is called a random unitary channel. It
is in the form Φ(A) =d∑i=1
piUiAU∗i where pi : 1 ≤ i ≤ d is a probability
distribution, and Ui is a unitary operator on H for each i. The identity map on
End(H) is a special case of the unitary channel.
2. A depolarizing channel is defined for 0 ≤ λ ≤ 1 by
Φλ : End(H) −→ End(H)
A 7−→ λ tr(A)dH
IH + (1− λ)A
where dH is the dimension of H, and IH is the identity map on H.
• For λ = 1, the map Φλ is called the completely depolarizing channel.
• If K is a Hilbert space, the generalized completely depolarizing channel is
the linear map Φ : End(H) −→ End(K) defined by Φ(A) = tr(A)dK
IK for
any A ∈ End(H), where IK is the identity matrix on K, and dk is the
dimension of the space K.
3. For −1dH−1
≤ λ ≤ 1dH+1
, let
Φλ : End(H)→ End(H)
Φλ(A) = λ tr(A)dH
IH + (1− λ)At
where At denotes the transpose matrix of A. The map Φλ is a quantum channel.
This channel is called the transpose depolarizing channel.
4. The partial trace, in Definition 1.2.20, is a quantum channel.
3. Introduction to Quantum Channels 60
We refer the reader to [12, p.123-129], for the proofs that the examples given
above are channels. The following proposition is straightforward.
Proposition 3.2.12. The tensor product of quantum channels, the composition of
composable quantum channels, and convex linear combinations of quantum channels
are quantum channels.
Proposition 3.2.13. Let H and K be Hilbert spaces. For any α ∈ End(H,K), the
map Adα is a linear completely positive map; it is a channel if and only if α is an
isometry.
Proof:
For A ∈ End(H) such that A ≥ 0, there exist B ∈ End(H) such that A = BB∗.
As
Adα(A) = αAα∗ = αBB∗α∗ = αB (αB)∗ ≥ 0
the map Adα is positive. Let n ∈ N, as End(H)⊗Mn (C) ' End(H ⊗ Cn), and
Adα ⊗ In = Ad(α⊗In)
it follows that Adα ⊗ In is positive. If α is an isometry, then
tr(Adα(A)) = tr(αAα∗) = tr(A)
so Adα is trace preserving.
Definition 3.2.14. [12, p.125].(Unital channel) Let H and K be Hilbert spaces. A
quantum channel Φ : End(H) −→ End(K) is said to be unital if
Φ( 1dHIH) = 1
dKIK
Example 3.2.15. The random unitary channel, and the depolarizing channel are
unital channels.
3. Introduction to Quantum Channels 61
3.2.3 Characterization of quantum channels
In this section, we give many equivalent representations of the quantum channel.
Definition 3.2.16. Let H and K be Hilbert spaces, and Φ : End(H) −→ End(K)
be a quantum channel. A Stinespring representation (dilation) of Φ is a pair (E,α)
consisting of a Hilbert space E (an environment space), and an isometry α : H −→
K ⊗ E such that Φ(A) = TrE(αAα∗) for any A ∈ End(H). The map TrE denotes
the partial trace over E.
Remark 3.2.17. In operator algebra, a Stinespring representation exists for any
completely positive map, see [28, p.43]. In the case of quantum channels, the partial
trace appears as a consequence of being a trace-preserving map. The author in [16,
p.107-109] explains the link between the two representations in both operator algebra
and quantum information theory.
Definition 3.2.18. Let H and K be Hilbert spaces, and Φ : End(H) −→ End(K) be
a completely positive map. A Kraus representation of Φ is a set of operators
Tj : 1 ≤ j ≤ k ⊂ End(H,K)
that satisfies
Φ(A) =k∑j=1
TjAT∗j
The operators Tj : 1 ≤ j ≤ k are called Kraus operators. If Φ is a quantum channel,
then a Kraus representation Tj : 1 ≤ j ≤ k of Φ is required to satisfy the additional
conditionk∑j=1
T ∗j Tj = IH.
The next proposition gives relationships among the different representations of
a quantum channel and its Choi matrix.
3. Introduction to Quantum Channels 62
Proposition 3.2.19. Let H and K be Hilbert spaces, and let Φ : End(H) −→
End(K) be a quantum channel.
1. If (E,α) is a Stinespring representation of Φ, and ej : 1 ≤ j ≤ dE is an
orthonormal basis for E, then the maps Tj : H −→ K, 1 ≤ j ≤ dE defined by
Tj = (IK ⊗ e∗j)α
yield a Kraus representation of Φ.
2. If Tj : 1 ≤ j ≤ k is a family of Kraus operators of Φ, then
(a) The space E = Ck, and the map α =k∑j=1
Tj ⊗ ej, where ej : 1 ≤ j ≤ k
is an orthonormal basis element for Ck, form a Stinespring representation
of Φ.
(b) The Choi matrix of Φ is given by C(Φ) =k∑j=1
Vec(Tj)Vec(Tj)∗.
Proof:
Let Tj = (IK ⊗ e∗j)α, and A ∈ End(H). SincedE∑j=1
(IK ⊗ e∗j)B(IK ⊗ ej) =
(IK ⊗ tr) (B) for any B ∈ End(K ⊗ E), then
dE∑j=1
TjAT∗j =
dE∑j=1
(IK ⊗ e∗j)αAα∗(IK ⊗ ej)
= (IK ⊗ tr) (αAα∗) = TrE(αAα∗) = Φ(A)
anddE∑j=1
T ∗j Tj =
dE∑j=1
α∗(I∗K ⊗ ej)(IK ⊗ e∗j)α
= α∗(IK ⊗dE∑j=1
eje∗j)α = α∗(IK ⊗ IE)α = IH.
For the proof of the second statement, see [41, p.51-p.54].
The following theorem summarizes the results in [41, p.51-54].
3. Introduction to Quantum Channels 63
Theorem 3.2.20. Let H and K be Hilbert spaces, and Φ : End(H) −→ End(K)
be a linear map. The following are equivalent:
1. Φ is a quantum channel.
2. The Choi matrix C(Φ) is a positive element in End(K ⊗ H) that satisfies
TrK(C(Φ)) = IH.
3. Φ has a Stinespring representation (E,α).
4. Φ has a Stinespring representation (E,α) such that dim(E) = rank(C(Φ)).
5. Φ has a Kraus representation.
6. Φ has a Kraus representation T1, T2, ...Tk of Φ where k = rank(C(Φ)).
As a corollary to the equivalence between (1) and (2) in the theorem above, we
have:
Corollary 3.2.21. Let H and K be Hilbert spaces. The set of all quantum channel
Φ : End(H) −→ End(K) can be identified with a proper subset of all the states of
K ⊗ H. Namely, the set % ∈ D(K ⊗ H) : TrK(%) = 1dHIH. This identification is
given by 1dHC, where C is the Choi-Jamiolkowski map.
Remark 3.2.22. For any quantum channel a Stinespring representation is never
unique. In [15], Holevo shows that if (E,α) and (E ′, α′) are two Stinespring represen-
tations of Φ : End(H) −→ End(K), then there exists a partial isometry J : E −→ E ′
such that α′ = (IK ⊗ J)α and α = (IK ⊗ J∗)α′. Stinespring representations with
minimal dimensionality of the space E are called minimal dilations. The next corol-
lary shows that the Stinespring representation with an environment space satisfies
dim(E) = rank(C(Φ)) is a minimal dilation.
By Proposition 3.2.19, and Theorem 3.2.20, we have:
3. Introduction to Quantum Channels 64
Corollary 3.2.23. Let H and K be Hilbert spaces, and Φ : End(H) −→ End(K)
be a quantum channel. The rank of the Choi matrix of Φ gives an achievable lower
bound for both the number of any Kraus operators of Φ, and of the dimension of any
environment space.
Proof:
Let T1, T2, ....Tk be Kraus operators of Φ. By Proposition 3.2.19, we have:
rank(C(Φ)) = rank
(k∑j=1
vec(Tj)vec(Tj)∗
)≤
k∑j=1
rank (vec(Tj)vec(Tj)∗) = k
By Theorem 3.2.20 (6), this bound is achievable. Let (α,E) be a Stinespring repre-
sentation of Φ. By Proposition 3.2.19 (1), there exist a set of Kraus operators which
has dE elements. Thus, rank(C(Φ)) ≤ dE. By Theorem 3.2.20 (4), this bound is
achievable.
3.3 G-covariant quantum channels
In this section, we restrict our study to a class of quantum channels that are also
G-equivariant maps with respect to a given group G.
Definition 3.3.1. Let (H, πH) and (K, πK) be two unitary representations of a group
G. A quantum channel Φ : End(H) −→ End(K) is G-covariant if
Φ(πH(g)Aπ∗H(g)) = πK(g)Φ(A)π∗K(g)
for each A ∈ End(H) and g ∈ G. If both πH and πK are irreducible representations,
then Φ is called G-irreducibly covariant.
We denote the set of all G-covariant channels from End(H) to End(K) by
QC(H,K)G.
3. Introduction to Quantum Channels 65
Examples 3.3.2. Let (H, πH) and (K, πK) be two unitary representations of a group
G.
1. The partial trace over H (Definition 1.2.20), is an example of a G-covariant
channel from End(H ⊗ K) to End(K). It is a quantum channel [12, p.124],
with a Stinespring representation (H, IH⊗K), and Kraus operators Tj = IK⊗e∗j :
1 ≤ j ≤ dH, where ej : 1 ≤ j ≤ dH is an orthonormal basis for H. By Lemma
1.2.21, it is a G-equivariant map.
2. The map Φ : End(H⊗K) −→ End(K⊗H) defined by Φ(A) = flipHKA (flipHK)∗
is a unitary conjugation, G-covariant quantum channel. Recall that by Lemma
1.2.23, the map flipHK is a G-equivariant map.
3. The generalized completely depolarizing channel (defined in Example 3.2.11) is
a G-covariant channel.
Proposition 3.3.3. Let G be a group. The tensor product of G-covariant channels,
and the composition of G-covariant channels are again G-covariant channels.
By the convexity of both the set of quantum channels [41, p.49], and the space
of G-equivariant maps, we have :
Proposition 3.3.4. Let (H, πH) and (K, πK) be two representations of a group G.
The set QC(H,K)G of G-covariant channels is a convex set.
As by Example 3.3.2, and Proposition 1.2.7, the partial trace, and the conjugation
map are G-equivariant, the proof of the following proposition is straightforward.
Proposition 3.3.5. Let (H, πH), (K, πK), and (E, πE) be representations of a group
G. Let Φ : End(H) −→ End(K) be a quantum channel given by a Stinespring
representation (E,α). If α : H −→ K ⊗ E is G-equivariant, then Φ is G-covariant.
3. Introduction to Quantum Channels 66
Recall that if H and K are vector spaces, and W is subspace of H, then the
restriction of a linear map Φ : End(H) −→ End(K) on End(W ), denoted by Φ |W ,
is the map Φ AdιW : End(W ) −→ End(K), where ιW is the inclusion map of W in
H.
Proposition 3.3.6. Let (H, πH) and (K, πK) be representations of a group G. Let
W be a G-invariant subspace of H, and Φ : End(H) −→ End(K) be G-covariant
channel. The restriction of Φ on End(W ) is a G-covariant channel.
Proof:
Let ιW be the inclusion map of W . By Lemma 1.2.10, and Proposition 1.2.7 (3),
the map AdιW : End(W ) −→ End(H) is G-equivariant. By Proposition 3.2.13, it is
a channel. As the composition of two G-covariant channels is G-covariant, the result
follows.
Remark 3.3.7. If (E,α) is a Stinespring representation of Φ, then (E,α ιW ) is a
Stinespring representation of Φ |W . Hence, the proof of the proposition above can be
done using Proposition 3.3.5.
Proposition 3.3.8. Let (H, πH) be a representation of a group G such that H =m⊕i=1
Wi, where Wi are G-invariant subspaces of H. Let qi : 1 ≤ i ≤ m be the
orthogonal projections of H on Wi. The map
Φ : End(H) −→m⊕i=1
End(Wi)
A 7−→m∑i=1
qiAq∗i
is a unital G-covariant channel.
3. Introduction to Quantum Channels 67
Proof:
By Lemma 1.2.10, qi : 1 ≤ i ≤ m is a set of G-equivariant maps, so by
Proposition 1.2.7 and Proposition 3.2.13, the conjugation map
Adqi : End(H) −→ End(Wi)
A 7−→ qiAq∗i
is a G-equivariant completely positive map; thus so is Φ. As (q∗i qi)mi=1 is a partition
of IH, and (qiq∗i )mi=1 is a partition of I m⊕
i=1Wi
, the map Φ is trace-preserving and unital.
The next proposition is taken from [7, p.6]; we provide a proof for completeness.
Proposition 3.3.9. Let (H, πH) and (K, πK) be two unitary representations of a
group G, and Φ : End(H) −→ End(K) be a linear map. Then
1. Φ is a G-covariant channel if and only if
1
dH
C(Φ) ∈ End(K ⊗H)G ∩% ∈ D(K ⊗H) : TrK(%) =
1
dH
IH
2. If πH is irreducible, then Φ is a G-covariant channel if and only if
1
dHC(Φ) ∈ D(K ⊗H)G.
Proof:
By Corollary 1.2.29, the map 1dHC is a bijective map. Hence
1dHC (A ∩B) = 1
dH(C (A) ∩ C (B))
for any A,B ⊆ End(End(H), End(K)). The first statement follows from this, Propo-
sition 1.2.32, and Corollary 3.2.21. For the second statement, assume πH is an irre-
ducible representation of G. By (1), it is enough to show that
End(K ⊗H)G ∩% ∈ D(K ⊗H) : TrK(%) = 1
dHIH
= D(K ⊗H)G
3. Introduction to Quantum Channels 68
Since
End(K ⊗H)G ∩% ∈ D(K ⊗H) : TrK(%) = 1
dHIH
⊆ D(K ⊗H)G
always holds, then we only have to prove the other inclusion.
Let % ∈ D(K ⊗H)G. For g ∈ G, we have
% = (πK(g)⊗ πH(g)) % (πK(g)⊗ πH(g))∗
As the partial trace is G-equivariant, we get
TrK(%) = TrK ((πK(g)⊗ πH(g)) % (πK(g)⊗ πH(g))∗) = πH(g)TrK (%) πH(g)∗
So, TrK(%) is intertwining the irreducible representation πH. By Schur’s Lemma
1.2.12, TrK% = λIH for some scalar λ. Taking the trace of both sides, we have
λ = 1dH
. Thus
%∈ End(K ⊗H)G ∩% ∈ D(K ⊗H) : TrK(%) = 1
dHIH
Lemma 3.3.10. Let (H, πH) and (K, πK) be two unitary representations of a group
G, and Φ : End(H) −→ End(K) be a G-covariant channel. If Tj : 1 ≤ j ≤ n are
Kraus operators of Φ, then for each g ∈ G, πK(g)TjπH(g)∗ : 1 ≤ j ≤ n are Kraus
operators of Φ.
Proof:
Let g ∈ G. As πH and πK are unitary representations, then
n∑j=1
(πK(g)TjπH(g)∗)∗ πK(g)TjπH(g)
∗ = πH(g)
(n∑j=1
T ∗j Tj
)πH(g)
∗ = IH
For A ∈ End(H), we have
n∑j=1
πK(g)TjπH(g)∗A (πK(g)TjπH(g)
∗)∗ =n∑j=1
πK(g)TjπH(g)∗AπH(g)T ∗j πK(g)
∗
3. Introduction to Quantum Channels 69
= πK(g)
(n∑j=1
TjπH(g)∗AπH(g)T ∗j
)πK(g)
∗
= πK(g)Φ(πH(g)∗AπH(g))πK(g)
∗
= πK(g)πK(g)∗Φ(A)πK(g)πK(g)
∗ = Φ(A)
the result follows by Definition 3.2.18.
Chapter 4
EPOSIC Channels
The present chapter introduces EPOSIC channels, examples of SU(2)-covariant
channels. We define these channels in the first section using Stinespring representa-
tion, and study them in the rest of this chapter. In Section 4.2, we obtain Kraus
representation of the EPOSIC channel, and compute its Choi matrix in Section 4.3.
In the next two sections, we compute a complementary channel, and the dual map of
the EPOSIC channel. We end this chapter with an application to operator algebra
by getting an example of a positive map that is not completely positive.
The main results of this chapter:
• Constructing EPOSIC channels (Proposition 4.1.1).
• Obtaining a Kraus representation, and the Choi matrix of the EPOSIC channel
(Definition 4.2.1, and Proposition 4.3.5).
• Computing a complementary channel, and the dual map of the EPOSIC channel
(Proposition 4.4.4, and Proposition 4.5.6).
70
4. EPOSIC Channels 71
• Obtaining an example of a positive, non-completely positive map (Proposition
4.6.3, and Proposition 4.6.5).
4.1 EPOSIC channels
Recall the SU(2)-equivariant isometry αm,n,h : Pm+n−2h −→ Pm⊗Pn that was
given in Proposition 2.3.5. According to Definition 3.2.16, and Proposition 3.3.5, this
isometry induces an SU(2)-covariant quantum channel Φm,n,h : End(Pm+n−2h) −→
End(Pm), that has a Stinespring representation (Pn, αm,n,h).
Proposition 4.1.1. For m,n, h ∈ N with 0 ≤ h ≤ minm,n, let r = m + n − 2h
and αm,n,h be as in Definition 2.3.2. The map Φm,n,h : End(Pr) −→ End(Pm) defined
for A ∈ End(Pr) by
Φm,n,h(A) = TrPn(αm,n,hAα∗m,n,h)
is an SU(2)-irreducibly covariant channel.
Definition 4.1.2. Let r,m ∈ N, and
E(r,m) = (n, h) ∈ N2 : r = m+ n− 2h, 0 ≤ h ≤ minm,n
For (n, h) ∈ E(r,m), we call the quantum channel Φm,n,h : End(Pr) −→ End(Pm),
defined in Proposition 4.1.1, an EPOSIC channel.
For r,m ∈ N, we denote by EC(r,m) the set of all EPOSIC channels from
End(Pr) into End(Pm), and abbreviate EC(m,m) to EC(m). As we show in Section
5.1, the set EC(r,m) constitutes the set of extreme points of all SU(2)-irreducibly
covariant channels from End(Pr) into End(Pm), justifying the nomenclature EPOSIC.
Lemma 4.1.3. Let r,m ∈ N. Then
E(r,m) = (r +m− 2l,m− l) ∈ N2 : 0 ≤ l ≤ minr,m
4. EPOSIC Channels 72
Proof:
Let B = (r +m− 2l,m− l) ∈ N2 : 0 ≤ l ≤ minr,m. Suppose that
(r + m − 2l,m − l) ∈ B for some 0 ≤ l ≤ minr,m. Set n0 = r + m − 2l and
h0 = m − l. The pair (n0, h0) satisfies r = n0 + m − 2h0 and 0 ≤ h0 ≤ minm,n0
(note that h0 ≤ h0 +(r− l)= m− l+r− l = m+r−2l = n0). According to Definition
4.1.2, (r +m− 2l,m− l) = (n0, h0) ∈ E(r,m).
Conversely, assume (n, h) ∈ E(r,m). Set l0 = m − h, then 0 ≤ l0 ≤ m,
n = r−m+2h = r+m−2l0, and l0 ≤ l0 +(n−h) = (m−h)+(n−h)= m+n−2h = r.
Hence, 0 ≤ l0 ≤ minr,m, and (n, h) = (r +m− 2l0,m− l0) ∈ B.
Consequently, we have:
Proposition 4.1.4. Let r,m∈ N. The set of all EPOSIC channels from End(Pr) to
End(Pm) is
EC(r,m) = Φm,r+m−2l,m−l : 0 ≤ l ≤ minr,m
Remark 4.1.5. In [14, p.42], using Schur’s Lemma, it is shown that anyG-irreducibly
covariant channel is unital, see Definition 3.2.14. It follows that the EPOSIC channels
are unital.
4.2 Kraus representations of EPOSIC channels
In this section, we obtain a Kraus representation for the EPOSIC channel Φm,n,h.
We exhibit some of their properties, and show that the obtained Kraus operators has
a symmetric relation.
Definition 4.2.1. Let m,n, h ∈ N with 0 ≤ h ≤ minm,n, and αm,n,h be the
isometry given in Definition 2.3.2. For 0 ≤ j ≤ n, let Tj : Pm+n−2h −→ Pm be the
4. EPOSIC Channels 73
map defined by
Tj = (IPm ⊗ fn∗
j )αm,n,h
where fnj : 0 ≤ j ≤ n denotes the standard basis for Pn.
In the definition above, we identify the two spaces Pm ⊗ C and Pm through the
unitary map u ⊗ λ 7−→ λu. By Proposition 3.2.19, the set Tj : 0 ≤ j ≤ n is a
Kraus representation of Φm,n,h. We call these Kraus operators, the EPOSIC Kraus
operators.
By direct computations using Corollary 2.3.13 and the definition above, one can
obtain the matrix coefficients of the EPOSIC Kraus operator as follows.
Proposition 4.2.2. Let m,n, h ∈ N with 0 ≤ h ≤ minm,n, and r = m+n−2h. If
Tj : 0 ≤ j ≤ n are the EPOSIC Kraus operators of Φm,n,h, then for each 0 ≤ j ≤ n,
Tj(fri ) =
εjifmlij
if j ∈ B(i)
0 otherwise
where εji and B(i) are given in Notation 2.3.10, and f ks : 0 ≤ s ≤ k is the standard
basis for Pk for k ∈ m, r.
Remarks 4.2.3. With the notation of 2.3.10, we have
j ∈ B(i)⇐⇒ max0, j − h ≤ i ≤ minr,m− h+ j
⇐⇒ max0, h− j ≤ lij ≤ minr − j + h,m
Hence,
1. According to the definition of Tj above, we have
rank(Tj) = dim(Col(Tj)) ≤ |i : j ∈ B(i)| = minm, m+ j − h, r, r − j + h
4. EPOSIC Channels 74
2. The Kraus operator Tj can be written as
Tj =
minr,m+j−h∑i=max0,j−h
εji fm
lijf r∗i
3. The Kraus operator Tj can also be written as
Tj =
minr−j+h,m∑l=max0,h−j
εjl+j−h fm
l fr∗l+j−h
4. The adjoint map of Tj is given by
T ∗j =
minr−j+h,m∑l=max0,h−j
εjl+j−hfr
l+j−hfm∗l
5. Every Tj has a vector representation in Pm ⊗ P r given by
V ec(Tj) =
minr,m−h+j∑i=max0,j−h
εji fm
lij⊗ f ri
Equivalently,
V ec(Tj) =
minr−j+h,m∑l=max0,h−j
εjl+j−h fm
l ⊗ f rl+j−h
The next proposition follows directly from Corollary 1.2.19.
Proposition 4.2.4. Let m,n, h ∈ N with 0 ≤ h ≤ minm,n, and r = m + n− 2h.
If Tj : 0 ≤ j ≤ n are the EPOSIC Kraus operators of Φm,n,h, then
〈Tj1 |Tj2 〉End(H,K)= r+1
n+1δj1j2
for each 0 ≤ j1, j2 ≤ n.
Recall by Remark 2.1.4 (1) that for g0 =[
0 1
−1 0
]∈ SU(2), we have
ρm(g0) (fml ) = (−1) lfmm−l
4. EPOSIC Channels 75
Proposition 4.2.5. Let m,n, h ∈ N with 0 ≤ h ≤ minm,n, r = m + n− 2h, and
Tj : 0 ≤ j ≤ n be the EPOSIC Kraus operators of Φm,n,h. For each 0 ≤ j ≤ n, we
have
ρm(g0)Tjρ∗r(g0) = (−1)j Tn−j
Proof:
Fix j ∈ N, such that 0 ≤ j ≤ n. For each 0 ≤ i ≤ r, we have one of the following
cases:
• If j ∈ B(i), since m− lij = l(r−i)(n−j) then by Corollary 2.3.15 (1), we have:
ρm(g0)Tj(fri ) = (−1)lij εjif
m
m−lij= (−1)lij+h εn−jr−i f
m
l(r−i)(n−j)
= (−1)lij+h Tn−j(fr
r−i) = (−1)jTn−jρr(g0)(f ri )
• If j /∈ B(i), then n− j /∈ n− B(i) = B(r − i) . So, both Tj(fri ) and Tn−j(f
rr−i)
are zero. This implies that the identity also holds in this case.
It is worth noticing that even though Φ is a G-covariant channel, Kraus operators
of Φ are not necessarily G-equivariant. The relation in Proposition 4.2.5 can be
translated into a symmetric relation among the vectors representing the operators Tj
and Tn−j in Pm⊗P r. Recall that by Lemma 1.2.25, the map Vec is SU(2)-equivariant;
thus applying the map Vec on both side of the equation in Proposition 4.2.5, we have:
Vec(Tn−j) = (−1)j (ρm(g0)⊗ ρr(g0)) Vec(Tj) (4.2.1)
Proposition 4.2.6. Let m,n, h ∈ N with 0 ≤ h ≤ minm,n, and r = m + n− 2h.
The EPOSIC Kraus operators Tj : 0 ≤ j ≤ n, and the maps Jm,Jr (Definition
2.1.5) satisfy
flipPmPr (Jm ⊗ J∗r ) (V ec(Tn−j)) = (−1)m+jV ec(T ∗j )
for each 0 ≤ j ≤ n.
4. EPOSIC Channels 76
Proof:
By Equation 4.2.1, we have
Vec(Tn−j) = (−1)j (ρm(g0)⊗ ρr(g0)) Vec(Tj)
Thus,
flipPmPr (Jm ⊗ J∗r ) (V ec(Tn−j)) = flipPmPr (Jm ⊗ J∗r ) ((−1)j (ρm(g0)⊗ ρr(g0)) Vec(Tj))
= (−1)jflipPmPr (Jm ⊗ J∗r ) (ρm(g0)⊗ ρr(g0))
(minr−j+h,m∑l=max0,h−j
εjl+j−h fm
l ⊗ f rl+j−h
)
= (−1)j
minr−j+h,m∑l=max0,h−j
(−1)j−hεjl+j−hflipPmPr
((Jm ⊗ J∗r )
(fmm−l ⊗ f rr−(l+j−h)
))= (−1)j
minr−j+h,m∑l=max0,h−j
(−1)mεjl+j−hflipPmPr
((fml ⊗ f rl+j−h
))= (−1)j+m
minr−j+h,m∑l=max0,h−j
εjl+j−h(f rl+j−h ⊗ fml
)= (−1)m+jV ec(T ∗j ).
The following corollary to Proposition 4.2.2 gives the matrix coefficients of the
EPOSIC channel Φm,n,h, with respect to the standard basis of Pm+n−2h.
Corollary 4.2.7. Let m,n, h ∈ N with 0 ≤ h ≤ minm,n, let r = m+ n− 2h. For
0 ≤ i1, i2 ≤ r,
Φm,n,h(fri1f r∗
i2) =
∑j∈B(i1)∩B(i2)
εji1εji2fmli1jf
m∗
li2j
For m ∈ N, and 0 ≤ i ≤ m, the set B(i) associated to the map αm,0,0 is equal to
0. It follows from this and Corollary 4.2.7, that the channel Φm,0,0 is the identity
map on End(Pm). We also have:
4. EPOSIC Channels 77
Corollary 4.2.8. Let m,n, h ∈ N with 0 ≤ h ≤ minm,n, and r = m+ n− 2h. If
Dk denotes the set of all diagonal operators in End(Pk), then
Φm,n,h(Dr) ⊆ Dm
Corollary 4.2.9. Let m,n, h ∈ N with 0 ≤ h ≤ minm,n, r = m + n − 2h, and
0 ≤ i ≤ r. The sets of non-zero eigenvalues of Φm,n,h(frr−if
r∗r−i), Φm,n,h(f
ri f
r∗i ), and
of Φn,m,h(fri f
r∗i ) coincide. They are all given by
(εji (m,n,h))2 : j ∈ B(i)
.
Proof:
By Corollary 4.2.7, the set (εji (m,n,h))2 : j ∈ B(i) contains all nonzero eigenval-
ues of Φm,n,h(fri f
r∗i ). Let g0 =
(0 1
−1 0
). As
ρr(g0) (f ri ) = (−1)if rr−i
the equivariance of the channel Φm,n,h gives
Φm,n,h(frr−if
r∗
r−i) = Φm,n,h(ρr(g0)f ri fr∗
i (ρr(g0))∗) = ρm(g0)Φm,n,h(fri f
r∗
i )(ρm(g0))∗
So, Φm,n,h(frr−if
r∗r−i) and Φm,n,h(f
ri f
r∗i ) are unitarily conjugate, and have the same
eigenvalues. For the last one, let
• Bm,n,h(i) = j : max0,−m+ i+ h ≤ j ≤ mini + h, n, the set B(i)
associated with αm,n,h, and
• Bn,m,h(i) = l : max0,−n+ i+ h ≤ l ≤ mini + h, m, the set B(i) associ-
ated with αn,m,h.
As l ∈ Bn,m,h(i) if and only if i− l + h ∈ Bm,n,h(i), we have
(εli(n,m,h))2 : l ∈ Bn,m,h(i) = (εli(n,m,h))2 : i−l+h ∈ Bm,n,h(i)
= (εi−j+hi (n,m,h))2 : j ∈ Bm,n,h(i)
= (εliji (n,m,h))2 : j ∈ Bm,n,h(i)
Corollary 2.3.16 (2) finishes the proof.
4. EPOSIC Channels 78
4.3 The Choi matrix of the EPOSIC channel
In this section, we show that the Choi matrix of Φm,n,h is a multiple of the projection
of Pm ⊗ P r onto the SU(2)-subspace isomorphic to the environment space Pn. The
following proposition is a special case of Proposition 1.2.17, where H = Pm ⊗ P r.
Proposition 4.3.1. Let ρm and ρr be the irreducible representations of SU(2) in Pm
and Pr respectively. Then End(Pm ⊗ P r)SU(2) is an abelian algebra generated by the
projections on the SU(2)-subspaces of Pm ⊗ P r.
Recall by Corollary 2.3.8, that the space Pm⊗P r decomposes into an orthogonal
direct sum of SU(2)-irreducible subspaces Vm+r−2l, 0 ≤ l ≤ minm, r. For each
0 ≤ l ≤ minm, r, the map ηm,r,l : Pm+r−2l −→ Pm ⊗ P r is an isometry whose
image is Vm+r−2l. The maps qm,r,l = ηm,r,lη∗m,r,l where 0 ≤ l ≤ minm, r are the
mutually orthogonal projections onto the subspaces Vm+r−2l. These projections satisfyminm,r∑
l=0
qm,r,l = IPm⊗Pr .
Since Φm,n,h is an SU(2)-covariant channel, by Proposition 4.3.1, and Proposition
1.2.32, we obtain:
Corollary 4.3.2. Let m,n, h ∈ N with 0 ≤ h ≤ minm,n, and r = m + n − 2h.
With the notation above, the Choi matrix of Φm,n,h is a linear combination of qm,r,l :
0 ≤ l ≤ minm, r.
Remark 4.3.3. For m,n, h ∈ N with 0 ≤ h ≤ minm,n, we have:
Pm ⊗ Pm+n−2h 'minm,m+n−2h⊕
l=0
Pn+2(m−h−l)
= Pn+2(m−h) ⊕ Pn+2(m−h−1) ⊕ ......⊕ Pn ⊕ ....⊕ Pn+2(m−h−minm,m+n−2h)
It follows that if r = m + n − 2h, then the set qm,r,l : 0 ≤ l ≤ minm, r contains
qm,r,m−h = ηm,r,m−hη∗m,r,m−h which is the projection on a subspace isomorphic to Pn.
The following lemma will be used in the proof of Proposition 4.3.5.
4. EPOSIC Channels 79
Lemma 4.3.4. Let m,n, h ∈ N with 0 ≤ h ≤ minm,n, and r = m + n− 2h. The
operator C(Φm,n,h)ηm,r,m−h is nonzero.
Proof:
Let f ks : 0 ≤ s ≤ k be the standard basis for Pk where k ∈ r, n,m. It is
enough to show that C(Φm,n,h) (ηm,r,m−h(fn0 )) 6= 0. By Lemma 1.2.30 and Corollary
4.2.7, we have:
C(Φm,n,h) =r∑
i1,i2=0
Φm,n,h(fr
i1f r∗
i2)⊗ f ri1f
r∗
i2=
r∑i1,i2=0
∑j∈B(i1)∩B(i2)
εji1εji2fmli1jf
m∗
li2j⊗ f ri1f
r∗
i2.
By Lemma 2.3.7 and Corollary 2.3.13, we have:
ηm,r,m−h(fn
0 ) = (IPm ⊗ Jr)αm,r,m−h(fn0 ) = (IPm ⊗ Jr)
(∑t∈B(0)
εt0(m,r,m−h)fml0t ⊗ fr
t
)
=∑t∈B(0)
(−1)tεt0(m,r,m−h)fml0t ⊗ fr
r−t =∑t∈B(0)
λtfm
m−(t+h) ⊗ f rr−t
where λt > 0 (Corollary 2.3.15 (4)).
Hence, we get:
C(Φm,n,h) (ηm,r,m−h(fn
0 )) =r∑
i1,i2=0
∑j∈B(i1)∩B(i2)
εji1εji2fmli1j
fm∗
li2j⊗f ri1f
r∗
i2
(∑t∈B(0)
λtfm
m−(t+h) ⊗ f rr−t
)
=r∑
i1,i2=0
∑j∈B(i1)∩B(i2)
∑t∈B(0)
λtεji1εji2
(fmli1jf
m∗
li2j
)fmm−(t+h)⊗
(f ri1f
r∗
i2
)f rr−t
But for 0 ≤ i1, i2 ≤ r, j ∈ B(i1) ∩B(i2) and t ∈ B(0), we have:
fmli1jfm∗
li2jfmm−(t+h) ⊗ f ri1f
r∗
i2f rr−t =
fmli1n⊗ f ri1 if i2 = r − t, j = n
0 otherwise
.
4. EPOSIC Channels 80
Since n ∈ B(i1) if and only if n− h ≤ i1 ≤ r, we have
C(Φm,n,h) (ηm,r,m−h(fn
0 )) =r∑
i1=n−h
∑t∈B(0)
λtεn
i1εnr−tf
m
i1−n+h ⊗ f ri1
Assume that
0 = C(Φm,n,h) (ηm,r,m−h(fn
0 )) =r∑
i1=n−h
∑t∈B(0)
λtεn
i1εnr−t f
m
i1−n+h ⊗ f ri1
By the linear independence of fml ⊗ f ri : 0 ≤ l ≤ m, 0 ≤ i ≤ r, we would have∑t∈B(0)
λtεn
i1εnr−t = 0 for n− h ≤ i1 ≤ r
Since by Corollary 2.3.15 (3),
εni1 6= 0 for n− h ≤ i1 ≤ r
we would have∑
t∈B(0)
λtεnr−t = 0.
But by Corollary 2.3.15 (3), we have
εnr−t = (−1)hθt with θt > 0 for t ∈ B(0) = t : 0 ≤ t ≤ m− h.
Therefore, ∑t∈B(0)
λtεn
r−t = (−1)h
m−h∑t=0
λtθt 6= 0
which is a contradiction.
4. EPOSIC Channels 81
Proposition 4.3.5. Let m,n, h ∈ N with 0 ≤ h ≤ minm,n, and r = m + n− 2h.
The Choi matrix of the EPOSIC channel Φm,n,h is given by
C(Φm,n,h) =r+1
n+1qm,r,m−h
where qm,r,m−h is the projection of Pm ⊗ P r onto the SU(2)-subspace of dimension
n+ 1.
Proof:
By Corollary 4.3.2, the Choi matrix
C(Φm,n,h) =
minm,r∑l=0
λlqm,r,l
whereqm,r,l = ηm,r,lη
∗m,r,l, 0 ≤ l ≤ minm, r
are the mutually orthogonal projec-
tions onto Vm+r−2l, 0 ≤ l ≤ minm, r. Consequently,
rank(C(Φm,n,h)) =
minm,r∑l=0,λl 6=0
rank(qm,r,l)
By Lemma 4.3.4, we have λm−h 6= 0, hence
rank(C(Φm,n,h)) ≥ rank(qm,r,m−h) = dim(Vn) = n+ 1
Since by Corollary 3.2.23, rank(C(Φm,n,h)) ≤ n+ 1,we have
C(Φm,n,h) = λm−hqm,r,m−h
Taking the trace of both sides of the equation, we get
r + 1 = tr(C(Φm,n,h)) = λm−htr(qm,r,m−h) = λm−hn+ 1
i.e. λm−h = r+1n+1
.
4. EPOSIC Channels 82
Remark 4.3.6. The above proposition establishes a one-to-one correspondence be-
tween EC(r,m), and the projections on the SU(2)-subspaces of Pm ⊗ P r. This cor-
respondence is given by
Φm,m+r−2l,m−l←→ r+1m+r−2l+1
qm,r,l
Consequently, we have:
Corollary 4.3.7. For r,m ∈ N, there are exactly minr,m+1 elements in EC(r,m).
4.4 A channel complementary to the EPOSIC chan-
nel
Let us first recall the notion of complementary channels given in [15]. Given
three Hilbert spaces H,K and E, and a linear isometry α : H −→ K ⊗ E, the maps
A 7−→ TrE(αAα∗) and A 7−→ TrK(αAα∗) where A ∈ End(H)
define two quantum channels
Φ : End(H) −→ End(K), and Ψ : End(H) −→ End(E)
The maps Φ and Ψ are called mutually complementary. By Theorem 3.2.20,
to any quantum channel, one can associate a complementary channel. However, as
the Stinespring representation (dilation) is not unique, there can be many candidates
for “the” complementary channel. In [15], Holevo shows that if (E,α) and (E ′, α′)
are two Stinespring representations of Φ : End(H) −→ End(K), then there exists a
partial isometry J : E −→ E ′ such that α′ = (IK⊗J)α and α = (IK⊗J∗)α′. It follows
that if ΨE and ΨE′ are complementary channels of Φ, then they are equivalent in the
sense that there exist a partial isometry J : E −→ E ′ such that ΨE(A) = J∗ΨE′(A)J
and ΨE′(A) = JΨE(A)J∗ for any A ∈ End(H). Moreover, if Ψ is a complementary
channel of Φ, then a complementary of Ψ is isometric to Φ [15, p.96].
4. EPOSIC Channels 83
Definition 4.4.1. Let H and K be Hilbert spaces, Φ : End(H) −→ End(K) be a
quantum channel, and (E,α) be a Stinespring representation of Φ. The map Ψ :
End(H) −→ End(E) sending A 7−→ TrK(αAα∗) is called a complementary channel
of Φ.
It follows from [15, p.96], and [16, p.125].
Proposition 4.4.2. Let (H, πH) and (K, πK) be two unitary representations of a
group G. If Φ : End(H) −→ End(K) is a G-covariant channel, then any channel
complementary to Φ is G-covariant.
The rest of this section is devoted to giving a formula for channel complementary
to EPOSIC channel. The next proposition is needed for the main result of this section.
Proposition 4.4.3. Let m,n, h ∈ N with 0 ≤ h ≤ minm,n. Then
flipPmPn αm,n,h = (−1)hαn,m,h
where αm,n,h is the isometry in Definition 2.3.2.
Proof:
Let r = m + n − 2h, and fks : 0 ≤ s ≤ k be the standard basis of Pk,
k ∈ r,m, n. For 0 ≤ i ≤ r, let
Bm,n,h(i) = j : max0,−m+ i+ h ≤ j ≤ mini+ h, n
and
Bn,m,h(i) = j : max0,−n+ i+ h ≤ j ≤ mini+ h, m
Since j ∈ Bm,n,h(i) if and only if lij = i − j + h ∈ Bn,m,h(i), we have by Corollary
2.3.16 (2),
flipPmPn αm,n,h(fr
i ) =∑
j∈Bm,n,h(i)
εji (m,n,h) fnj ⊗ fmlij = (−1)h
∑lij∈B
n,m,h(i)
εliji (n,m,h) fnj ⊗ fmlij
4. EPOSIC Channels 84
Let l = lij, then
flipPmPn αm,n,h(fr
i ) = (−1)h∑
l∈Bn,m,h(i)
εli(n,m,h) fni−l+h ⊗ fml
= (−1)h∑
l∈Bn,m,h(i))
εli(n,m,h) fnlil ⊗ fm
l = (−1)hαn,m,h(f
r
i )
Recall that EPOSIC channel Φm,n,h has a Stinespring representation given by
(Pn, αm,n,h) such that αm,n,h : Pm+n−2h −→ Pm ⊗ Pn.
Proposition 4.4.4. Let m,n, h ∈ N with 0 ≤ h ≤ minm,n. The channel Φn,m,h is
a channel complementary to Φm,n,h.
Proof:
By Proposition 4.4.3, and Lemma 1.2.23, we have:
TrPm(αm,n,hAα
∗m,n,h
)= TrPm
(flipPmPn αn,m,hAα
∗n,m,h
(flipPmPn
)∗)= TrPm
(αn,m,hAα
∗n,m,h
)= Φn,m,h(A).
Recall that by Proposition 2.1.6, for any m ∈ N, the map Jm : Pm −→ Pm is unitary.
The following corollary to Proposition 4.4.3 will be used in the next section.
Corollary 4.4.5. For m,n, h ∈ N with 0 ≤ h ≤ minm,n,
flipPmPn (Jm ⊗ J∗n)ηm,n,h = (−1)h ηn,m,h
4. EPOSIC Channels 85
Proof:
By Lemma 2.3.7, we have
flipPmPn (Jm ⊗ J∗n)ηm,n,h = flipPmPn (Jm ⊗ J∗n)(IPm ⊗ Jn)αm,n,h
= flipPmPn (Jm ⊗ IPn)αm,n,h
By Proposition 2.1.8, and Proposition 4.4.3, we get
flipPmPn (Jm ⊗ J∗n)ηm,n,h = (IPn ⊗ Jm)flipPmPn αm,n,h
= (−1)h(IPn ⊗ Jm)αn,m,h = (−1)
hηn,m,h.
4.5 Duals of EPOSIC channels
In this section, we give a formula for the dual map of Φm,n,h, and investigate when
this map is a channel. We begin by recalling the definition, and some properties of
the dual map of a linear map.
Definition 4.5.1. Let H and K be Hilbert spaces, and Φ : End(H) −→ End(K)
be a linear map. The dual map of Φ is the unique map Φ∗ : End(K) −→ End(H)
satisfying
〈B |Φ(A)〉End(K)
= 〈Φ∗(B) |A〉End(H)
for any A ∈ End(H) and B ∈ End(K), where 〈 · |· 〉End(H)
and 〈 · | ·〉End(K)
are the
Hilbert-Schmidt inner products on End(H) and End(K), respectively.
The proofs of the following propositions are given in Appendix A.
4. EPOSIC Channels 86
Proposition 4.5.2. Let H and K be Hilbert spaces, and Φ : End(H) −→ End(K)
be a linear map. Then
1. Φ∗ is completely positive if and only if Φ is completely positive.
2. Φ∗ is trace-preserving if and only if Φ(IH) = IK.
Proposition 4.5.3. Let (H, πH) and (K, πK) be two unitary representations of a
group G. A linear map Φ : End(H) −→ End(K) is G-equivariant if and only if Φ∗
is G-equivariant.
Proposition 4.5.4. Let H and K be Hilbert spaces, and Φ : End(H) −→ End(K)
be a completely positive map. If Ti : 1 ≤ i ≤ d are Kraus operators of Φ, then
T ∗i : 1 ≤ i ≤ d are Kraus operators of Φ∗.
The rest of this section is devoted to finding the dual map of the EPOSIC channel.
As the Choi-Jamiolkowski map is unitary (Corollary 1.2.29), we obtain a relation
between Φm,n,h and Φ∗m,n,h by examining their Choi matrices, C(Φm,n,h) ∈ End(Pm⊗
P r), and C(Φ∗m,n,h) ∈ End(Pr ⊗ Pm).
Proposition 4.5.5. For m,n, h ∈ N with 0 ≤ h ≤ minm,n, let r = m + n − 2h
and Tm,r =flipPmPr (Jm ⊗ J∗r ). Then
C(Φ∗m,n,h) = Tm,rC(Φm,n,h)T ∗m,r
Proof:
Let Tj : 0 ≤ j ≤ n be the EPOSIC Kraus operators of Φm,n,h, then T ∗j : 0 ≤
j ≤ n are Kraus operators for Φ∗m,n,h. By Propositions 3.2.19 2(b), and Proposition
4.2.6, we have
C(Φ∗m,n,h) =n∑j=0
V ec(T ∗j )(V ec
(T ∗j))∗
=n∑j=0
Tm,rV ec(Tn−j) (Tm,rV ec(Tn−j))∗
=n∑j=0
Tm,rV ec(Tn−j) (V ec(Tn−j))∗ T ∗m,r = Tm,r
(n∑j=0
V ec(Tn−j) (V ec(Tn−j))∗
)T ∗m,r
4. EPOSIC Channels 87
= Tm,r
(n∑j=0
V ec(Tj) (V ec(Tj))∗
)T ∗m,r = Tm,rC(Φm,n,h)T ∗m,r.
Proposition 4.5.6. Let m,n, h ∈ N with 0 ≤ h ≤ minm,n. Then
Φ∗m,n,h =m+n−2h+1
m+1Φm+n−2h,n,n−h
Proof:
Let r = m+ n− 2h. By Corollary 1.2.29, it suffices to show that
C(Φ∗m,n,h) = r+1m+1
C(Φr,n,n−h)
By Proposition 4.5.5, this is equivalent to show
Tm,rC(Φm,n,h)T ∗m,r = r+1m+1
C(Φr,n,n−h)
By Proposition 4.3.5, it suffices to show that
Tm,rqm,r,m−hT ∗m,r = qr,m,m−h
where qm,r,m−h, and qr,m,m−h are the projections on the SU(2)-irreducible subspaces of
Pm ⊗ P r and Pr ⊗ Pm respectively. By Corollary 2.3.8, and Corollary 4.4.5, one has
Tm,rqm,r,m−hT ∗m,r = Tm,rηm,r,m−hη∗m,r,m−hT ∗m,r
= flipPmPr (Jm ⊗ J∗r ) ηm,r,m−h(flipPmPr (Jm ⊗ J∗r ) ηm,r,m−h
)∗= ηr,m,m−hη
∗r,m,m−h = qr,m,m−h.
By Proposition 4.5.6, we have
Corollary 4.5.7. The dual map of Φm,n,h is a quantum channel if and only if n = 2h.
In this case Φ∗m,2h,h is equal to Φm,2h,h.
4. EPOSIC Channels 88
4.6 A positive map that is not completely positive
By Proposition 4.1.4, for m ∈ Nr 0, the set of EPOSIC channels from End(P1) to
End(Pm) is given by
EC(1,m) = Φm,m+1,m,Φm,m−1,m−1
Below f 10 , f
11 is the standard basis for P1, given by f 1
0 (x1, x2) = x2 and f 11 (x1, x2) =
x1.
Lemma 4.6.1. Let h ∈ P1 with ‖h‖ = 1. Then
1. There exists gh ∈ SU(2) such that ρ1(gh) (f 10 ) = h.
2. If Φ : End(P1) −→ End(Pm) is an SU(2)-equivariant map, then the matrices
Φ(hh∗) and Φ(f 10 f
1∗0 ) have the same eigenvalues.
Proof:
Assume that h is a unit element in P1; then h can be written as u0f10 + u1f
11 for
some u0, u1 ∈ C that satisfy |u0|2 + |u1|2 = 1. Let gh =
u0 u1
−u1 u0
∈ SU(2). By
Remark 2.1.4 (1), we have
(ρ1(gh)f 1
0 )(x1,x2) = f 1
0 (u0x1 − u1x2, u1x1 + u0x2)
= u1x1 + u0x2 = u0f1
0 (x1,x2) + u1f1
1 (x1,x2)
= h(x1,x2).
For the second statement, by (1), we have
hh∗ = ρ1(gh)f 1
0 f1∗
0 ρ∗1 (gh)
So, by the equivariance property of Φ, we have
Φ(hh∗) = Φ(ρ1(gh)f 1
0 f1∗
0 ρ∗1 (gh)) = ρ1(gh)Φ(f 1
0 f1∗
0 )ρ∗1 (gh)
4. EPOSIC Channels 89
which gives the result.
By direct computations using the formula for εji in Corollary 2.3.13, and by
Corollary 4.2.7, one can show:
Lemma 4.6.2. Let m ∈ Nr 0. Then
1. Φm,m+1,m(f 10 f
1∗0 ) =
m∑j=0
2(m−j+1)(m+1)(m+2)
fmm−jfm∗m−j.
2. Φm,m−1,m−1(f 10 f
1∗0 ) =
m−1∑j=0
2(j+1)m(m+1)
fmm−j−1fm∗m−j−1.
Proposition 4.6.3. For m ∈ Nr 0 and α ∈ R, the linear map
Φm,m+1,m − αΦm,m−1,m−1 : End(P1) −→ End(Pm)
is positive if and only if α ≤ 1m+2
.
Proof:
Let A be a positive matrix in End(P1). By the spectral theorem, there exist an
orthonormal basis e1, e2 for P1, and non-negative numbers λ1, λ2 such that
A =2∑i=1
λieie∗i .
To show that Φ := Φm,m+1,m−αΦm.m−1,m−1 is positive, it suffices to show the positivity
of Φ(eie∗i ). By Lemma 4.6.1, this is equivalent to the positivity of Φ(f 1
0 f1∗0 ).
By Lemma 4.6.2, we have that
Φ(f 1
0 f1∗
0 ) = Φm,m+1,m(f 1
0 f1∗
0 )− αΦm,m−1,m−1(f 1
0 f1∗
0 ) ≥ 0
if and only if
m∑j=0
2(m−j+1)
(m+1)(m+2)fmm−jf
m∗
m−j − αm−1∑j=0
2(j+1)
m(m+1)fmm−j−1f
m∗
m−j−1 ≥ 0
4. EPOSIC Channels 90
if and only if
2
m+2fmm f
m∗
m +m−1∑j=0
[2(m−j)
(m+1)(m+2)− α 2(j+1)
m(m+1)
]fmm−j−1f
m∗
m−j−1 ≥ 0.
Thus
Φ(f 1
0 f1∗
0 ) ≥ 0⇐⇒ α ≤ min m(m−j)(m+2) (j+1)
: 0 ≤ j ≤ m− 1.
Since the map f(t) = (m−t)t+1
is decreasing for 0 ≤ t ≤ m− 1, then
min m(m−j)(m+2) (j+1)
: 0 ≤ j ≤ m− 1 = 1m+2
Consequently, Φ(f 10 f
1∗0 ) ≥ 0 if and only if α ≤ 1
m+2.
The following lemma follows by direct computation, using the formula for εji in
Corollary 2.3.13.
Lemma 4.6.4. For m ∈ Nr 0, we have
ε0
1(m,1,0) =√
mm+1
, ε1
1(m,1,0) =√
1m+1
and
ε0
0(m,1,1) =√
1m+1
, ε1
0(m,1,1) = −√
mm+1
Proposition 4.6.5. Let m ∈ Nr 0. For α > 0, the map
Φm,m+1,m − αΦm,m−1,m−1
is not completely positive.
Proof:
Let Φ := Φm,m+1,m− αΦm,m−1,m−1. By Theorem 3.1.5, it is enough to show that
−2αm
is an eigenvalue of C(Φ).
By Proposition 4.3.5,
C(Φm,m+1,m) = 2m+2
ηm,1,0η∗m,1,0
4. EPOSIC Channels 91
and
C(Φm,m−1,m−1) = 2mηm,1,1η
∗m,1,1
Let v =√m(fm0 ⊗ f 1
0 ) + fm1 ⊗ f 11 , then
C(Φm,m+1,m) (v) = 2m+2
ηm,1,0η∗m,1,0 (
√m(fm0 ⊗ f 1
0 ) + fm1 ⊗ f 11 )
= 2m+2
ηm,1,0 [(−√mε1
1(m,1,0) + ε01(m,1,0))fm+1
1 ]
= 2m+2
ηm,1,0
[(−√
mm+1
+√
mm+1
)fm+11
](Lemma 4.6.4)
= 2m+2
ηm,1,0 [0× fm+11 ]= 0.
Similarly,
C(Φm,m−1,m−1) (v) = 2mηm,1,1η
∗m,1,1 (
√m(fm0 ⊗ f 1
0 ) + fm1 ⊗ f 11 )
= 2m+2
ηm,1,1 [(−√mε1
0(m,1,1) + ε00(m,1,1))fm−1
0 ]
= 2m
( m+1√m+1
)ηm,1,1(fm−10 ) (Lemma 4.6.4)
= 2√m+1m
[1∑j=0
(−1)jεj0fm1−j ⊗ f 1
1−j
]= 2
√m+1m
( 1√m+1
fm1 ⊗ f 11 +
√mm+1
fm0 ⊗ f 10 )
= 2m
(fm1 ⊗ f 11 +√mfm0 ⊗ f 1
0 )= 2mv.
So, we have
C(Φ)(v) = C(Φm,m+1,m)(v)− αC(Φm,m−1,m−1)(v) = −2αmv
Hence, −2αm
is a negative eigenvalue of C(Φ) for any α > 0.
Combining the result of Proposition 3.1.3, and 4.6.3 and Theorem 3.1.4, we
obtain:
Theorem 4.6.6. Let m ∈ Nr 0. For α > 0, the map
Φm,m+1,m − αΦm,m−1,m−1
is not n-positive for any n > 1.
Chapter 5
SU(2)-Irreducibly Covariant
Channels
Here, we study SU(2)-irreducibly covariant channels. In the first section, we use
results from Section 4.3 to show that the EPOSIC channels EC(r,m) form a spanning
set of the set of all SU(2)-irreducibly equivariant maps End(End(Pr), End(Pm))SU(2).
We also show that they are the extreme points of the set of all SU(2)-irreducibly
covariant channels QC(Pr, Pm)SU(2). In Section 5.2, we decompose SU(2)-irreducibly
covariant channels as orthogonal direct sums of operators between isomorphic SU(2)-
irreducible subspaces of End(Pr) and End(Pm) respectively.
The main results of this chapter:
• The EPOSIC channels EC(r,m) constitute the extreme points of the SU(2)-
irreducibly covariant channels QC(Pr, Pm)SU(2) (Corollary 5.1.5).
• Any completely positive SU(2)-irreducibly equivariant map is a multiple of an
SU(2)-covariant channel (Corollary 5.1.6).
92
5. SU(2)-Irreducibly Covariant Channels 93
• Any SU(2)-irreducibly covariant channel is an orthogonal direct sum of opera-
tors (Corollary 5.2.4).
5.1 Extreme points of SU(2)-irreducibly covariant
channels
Recall that for r,m ∈ N, the set EC(r,m) is Φm,r+m−2l,m−l, 0 ≤ l ≤ minr,m , and
QC(Pr, Pm)SU(2) is the set of SU(2)-irreducibly covariant channels from End(Pr) to
End(Pm). In this section, we show that EC(r,m) consist of all the extreme points of
QC(Pr, Pm)SU(2).
Recall also that End(End(Pr), End(Pm))SU(2) denotes the vector space of the
SU(2)-equivariant maps from End(Pr) to End(Pm).
Proposition 5.1.1. Let r,m ∈ N. The set EC(r,m) is a spanning set of
End(End(Pr), End(Pm))SU(2)
.
Proof:
By Proposition 4.3.1, and Proposition 4.3.5, we have
End(Pm ⊗ P r)SU(2) =
minr,m∑
l=0
λlqm,r,l : λl ∈ C
=
minr,m∑
l=0
µlC(Φm,m+r−2l,m−l) : µl ∈ C
= Span C (Φ) : Φ ∈ EC(r,m)
The result now follows from Corollary 1.2.29 and Proposition 1.2.32.
5. SU(2)-Irreducibly Covariant Channels 94
Proposition 5.1.2. Let r,m ∈ N. The set QC(Pr, Pm)SU(2) is the convex hull of
EC(r,m).
Proof:
Let Φ ∈ QC(Pr, Pm)SU(2). Since Φ is an SU(2)-equivariant map, then by Propo-
sition 5.1.1, we have
Φ =
minr,m∑l=0
λlΦm,m+r−2l,m−l λl ∈ C
It remains to show that 0 ≤ λl andminr,m∑
l=0
λl = 1. By Remark 4.3.6, we have
C(Φ) =
minr,m∑l=0
r+1m+r−2l+1
λlqm,r,l
where qm,r,l , 0 ≤ l ≤ minr,m are mutually orthogonal projections of Pm⊗P r. By
the orthogonality of the projections qm,r,l , 0 ≤ l ≤ minr,m, and the positivity of
C(Φ), we have λl ≥ 0 for 0 ≤ l ≤ minm, r.
As Φ and Φm,m+r−2l,m−l are trace preserving, by choosing any state % ∈ D(Pr), we have
1 = tr(%) = tr(Φ(%)) =
minr,m∑l=0
λltr(Φm,m+r−2l,m−l(%)) =
minr,m∑l=0
λl
Since EC(r,m) ⊆ QC(Pr, Pm)SU(2) the result follows.
Proposition 5.1.3. Let r,m ∈ N. Any element in QC(Pr, Pm)SU(2) is uniquely writ-
ten as a convex combination of elements of EC(r,m).
Proof:
By Proposition 5.1.2, we need only to prove the uniqueness. Let Ψ ∈ QC(Pr, Pm)SU(2)
such thatminr,m∑
l=0
λlΦl = Ψ =
minr,m∑l=0
µlΦl
5. SU(2)-Irreducibly Covariant Channels 95
where Φl = Φm,m+r−2l,m−l. By Proposition 4.3.5, and the orthogonality of
qm,r,l, 0 ≤ l ≤ minm, r
we haver+1
m+r−2l+1λlqm,r,l = qm,r,lC(Ψ) =
r+1
m+r−2l+1µlqm,r,l
Thus, λl = µl.
The following definition is a special case of the definition of the extreme sets
given in [31, p.70].
Definition 5.1.4. Let K be a subset of a vector space X, and x ∈ K. we say that
x is an extreme point of K if x is not an internal point of a line interval whose end
points are in K. Analytically, the condition can be expressed as follows:
if y ∈ K, z ∈ K, 0 < t < 1, and x = ty + (1− t)z, then x = y = z.
i.e. x can not be written as a proper convex combination of elements of K other than
itself.
Corollary 5.1.5. Let r,m ∈ N. The set EC(r,m) forms all the extreme points of
QC(Pr, Pm)SU(2).
Proof:
As EC(r,m) ⊂ QC(Pr, Pm)SU(2), by Proposition 5.1.3, we have EC(r,m) are
extreme points of QC(Pr, Pm)SU(2). On the other direction, if Φ is an extreme point
of QC(Pr, Pm)SU(2), then it can not be written as a linear combination of elements of
QC(Pr, Pm)SU(2) other than itself. Hence, Φ must be in EC(r,m).
As EC(r,m) is a spanning set of both End(End(Pr), End(Pm))SU(2), and
QC(Pr, Pm)SU(2), we have the following corollary:
5. SU(2)-Irreducibly Covariant Channels 96
Corollary 5.1.6. Let r,m ∈ N. Any completely positive SU(2)-equivariant linear
map Φ : End(Pr) −→ End(Pm) is a multiple of an SU(2)-irreducibly covariant chan-
nel.
Proof:
By Proposition 5.1.1, we have
Φ =
minr,m∑l=0
λlΦm,r+m−2l,m−l
for some λl ∈ C. Since Φ is completely positive, the coefficients λl are non-negative
(otherwise, C(Φ) =minr,m∑
l=0
r+1m+r−2l+1
λlqm,r,l will have a negative eigenvalue).
Let λ =minr,m∑
l=0
λl.
If λ = 0 then λl = 0 for all 0 ≤ l ≤ minr,m, and Φ = 0 is a multiple of any
SU(2)-irreducibly covariant channel. If λ 6= 0, then
Ψ =
minm,r∑l=0
λlλ
Φm,m+r−2l,m−l
is a convex combination of EPOSIC channels. Thus, by Proposition 5.1.2, Ψ is an
SU(2)-irreducibly covariant channel, and Φ = λΨ.
Remark 5.1.7. For Φ ∈ QC(Pr, Pm)SU(2), the dual map of Φ can be computed using
Proposition 5.1.2, and Proposition 4.5.6. It also follows (by Corollary 4.5.7) that the
map Φ∗ is a quantum channel if and only if Φ ∈ QC(Pm)SU(2).
Recall thatQC(Pm)SU(2), the set of all SU(2)-covariant channels fromEnd(Pm) −→
End(Pm), is the convex hull of EC(m) = Φm,2h,h : 0 ≤ h ≤ m. Let denote the
composition of two channels, then
Proposition 5.1.8. The set(QC(Pm)SU(2),
)is an abelian monoid. It is closed
under involution, in fact every element is self-adjoint.
5. SU(2)-Irreducibly Covariant Channels 97
Proof:
As the composition of two G-covariant channels is again G-covariant, the com-
position of linear maps is an associative binary operation on QC(Pm)SU(2), with the
identity map being the identity element. By Proposition 4.3.1, it is abelian. Since
the dual map of Φm,2h,h is Φm,2h,h (Corollary 4.5.7), then by Proposition 5.1.3 every
element is self adjoint, so QC(Pm)SU(2) is closed under involution.
We complete this section with two examples of SU(2)-irreducibly covariant chan-
nels written as convex combinations of EPOSIC channels.
Example I: The generalized completely depolarizing channel
Recall that the generalized completely depolarizing channel is defined for Hilbert
spaces H and K by
Φ : End(H) −→ End(K)
A −→ tr(A)dK
IK
where IK is the identity matrix on K, and dk is the dimension of the space K. Recall
also that it is a G-covariant channel, see Example 3.3.2. For r,m ∈ N, we denote the
generalized completely depolarizing channel from End(Pr) to End(Pm) by Ψr,m.
Proposition 5.1.9. Let r,m ∈ N. Then
Ψr,m(A) =
minr,m∑l=0
r+m−2l+1(r+1)(m+1)
Φm,r+m−2l,m−l(A).
for any A ∈ End(Pr).
5. SU(2)-Irreducibly Covariant Channels 98
Proof:
By Corollary 5.1.2, there exist λl : 0 ≤ l ≤ minr,m such that
0 ≤ λl ≤ 1,minr,m∑
l=0
λl = 1, and
Ψr,m =
minr,m∑l=0
λl Φm,r+m−2l,m−l
Applying the Choi-Jamiolkowski map on both sides, by Proposition 4.3.5, we get
C(Ψr,m) =
minr,m∑l=0
λlr+1
r+m−2l+1qm,r,l.
On the other hand, by Lemma 1.2.30,
C(Ψr,m) =∑i1,i2
tr(Ei1i2 )
m+1
IPm ⊗ Ei1i2 =∑i1,i2
1
m+1
δi1i2 IPm ⊗ Ei1i2
=∑i1
1
m+1
IPm ⊗ Ei1i1 =1
m+1
IPm ⊗∑i1
Ei1i1 =1
m+1
IPm ⊗ IPr
Thusminr,m∑
l=0
λl(r+1)(m+1)r+m−2l+1
qm,r,l = IPm ⊗ IPr
By the orthogonality of qm,r,l : 0 ≤ l ≤ minr,m, we have
λs(r+1)(m+1)r+m−2s+1
qm,r,s = qm,r,s (IPm ⊗ IPr) = qm,r,s
for 0 ≤ s ≤ minr,m. Taking the trace of both sides, we get λs = r+m−2s+1(r+1)(m+1)
.
Example II: The maps Φ1,m−1,0 Φm,m−1,m−1 and Φ1,m−1,0 Φm,m+1,m
Recall (by Proposition 4.1.4) that for m ∈ Nr 0,
EC(1,m) = Φm,m+1,m,Φm,m−1,m−1, and EC(m, 1) = Φ1,m+1,1,Φ1,m−1,0
Lemma 5.1.10. For m ∈ Nr 0, and 0 ≤ i ≤ m, we have
Φ1,m−1,0(fm
i fm∗
i ) = m−imf 1
0 f1∗0 + i
mf 1
1 f1∗1
where fmi : 0 ≤ i ≤ m is the standard basis for Pm.
5. SU(2)-Irreducibly Covariant Channels 99
Proof:
To simplify the notation, let εji := εji (1,m−1,0) for any j ∈ B(i). For 1 ≤ i ≤ m− 1,
by direct computation, we have
εi−1i =
√im, εii =
√m−im
We also have ε00 = 1, and εm−1
m = 1.
Thus, by Corollary 4.2.7,
Φ1,m−1,0(fm
i fm∗
i ) =∑j∈B(i)
(εji )2fmlijf
m∗
lij=
(ε00)
2f 10 f
1∗0 i = 0
(εi−1i )2f 1
1 f1∗1 + (εii)
2f 10 f
1∗0 1 ≤ i ≤ m− 1
(εm−1m )2f 1
1 f1∗1 i = m
=
f 10 f
1∗0 i = 0
imf 1
1 f1∗1 + m−i
mf 1
0 f1∗0 1 ≤ i ≤ m− 1
f 11 f
1∗1 i = m
= imf 1
1 f1∗1 + m−i
mf 1
0 f1∗
0 .
Proposition 5.1.11. For m ∈ Nr 0, we have
Φ1,m−1,0 Φm,m+1,m = Φ1,2,1
5. SU(2)-Irreducibly Covariant Channels 100
and
Φ1,m−1,0 Φm,m−1,m−1 = m−12m
Φ1,2,1 + m+12m
Φ1,0,0
Proof:
By Proposition 5.1.2, both maps Φ1,m−1,0 Φm,m+1,m, and Φ1,m−1,0 Φm,m−1,m−1
are convex combination of elements in EC(1, 1) = Φ1,2,1,Φ1,0,0. So, there exist
0 ≤ p1, p2 ≤ 1 such that
Φ1,m−1,0 Φm,m+1,m = p1Φ1,2,1 + (1− p1)Φ1,0,0
and
Φ1,m−1,0 Φm,m−1,m−1 = p2Φ1,2,1 + (1− p2)Φ1,0,0
To find p1 and p2, we evaluate the expressions above at f 10 f
1∗0 . By Lemma 4.6.2, and
Lemma 5.1.10, we have
Φ1,m−1,0Φm,m+1,m(f 1
0 f1∗
0 ) = Φ1,m−1,0
(m∑j=0
2(m−j+1)(m+1)(m+2)
fmm−jfm∗
m−j
)
= Φ1,m−1,0
(m∑i=0
2(i+1)(m+1)(m+2)
fmi fm∗
i
)=
m∑i=0
2(i+1)(m+1)(m+2)
Φ1,m−1,0
(fmi f
m∗i
)=
m∑i=0
2(i+1)(m+1)(m+2)
[m−imf 1
0 f1∗0 + i
mf 1
1 f1∗1
]= 2
m(m+1)(m+2)
[m∑i=0
(i+ 1)(m− i)f 1
0 f1∗
0 +m∑i=0
i(i+ 1)f 1
1 f1∗
1
]
= 2m(m+1)(m+2)
[m(m+1)(m+2)
6f 1
0 f1∗
0 + m(m+1)(m+2)3
f 1
1 f1∗
1
]= 1
3f 1
0 f1∗0 + 2
3f 1
1 f1∗
1
On the other hand, direct computations using Corollary 4.2.7, gives
p1Φ1,2,1(f 1
0 f1∗
0 ) + (1− p1)Φ1,0,0(f 1
0 f1∗
0 ) = p1
3f 1
0 f1∗0 + 2p1
3f 1
1 f1∗
1 + (1− p1)f1
0 f1∗
0
5. SU(2)-Irreducibly Covariant Channels 101
Thus p1 = 1. In similar way, by Lemma 4.6.2, we have
Φ1,m−1,0Φm,m−1,m−1(f1
0 f1∗
0 ) = Φ1,m−1,0
(m−1∑j=0
2(j+1)m(m+1)
fmm−j−1fm∗
m−j−1
)
= Φ1,m−1,0
(m−1∑i=0
2(m−i)m(m+1)
fmi fm∗
i
)
=m−1∑i=0
2(m−i)m(m+1)
Φ1,m−1,0
(fmi f
m∗
i
)=
m−1∑i=0
2(m−i)m(m+1)
[(m−i)m
f 1
0 f1∗
0 + imf 1
1 f1∗
1
]= 2
m2(m+1)
[m−1∑i=0
(m− i)2f 1
0 f1∗
0 +m−1∑i=0
i(m− i)f 1
1 f1∗
1
]= 2
m2(m+1)
[m(m+1)(2m+1)
6f 1
0 f1∗
0 + m(m+1)(m−1)6
f 1
1 f1∗
1
]= 2m+1
3mf 1
0 f1∗
0 + m−13m
f 1
1 f1∗
1
On the other hand
p2Φ1,2,1(f 1
0 f1∗
0 ) + (1− p2)Φ1,0,0(f 1
0 f1∗
0 ) = p2
3f 1
0 f1∗0 + 2p2
3f 1
1 f1∗
1 + (1− p2)f1
0 f1∗
0
which implies that p2 = m−12m
.
5.2 SU(2)-irreducibly covariant channel as direct
sum of operators
In this section, we use the decomposition of End(Pr) and End(Pm) in Proposition
2.4.1, to write any SU(2)-irreducibly covariant channel as an orthogonal direct sum
of operators. Recall that if H1, H2, ......Hn is a family of complex Hilbert spaces, then
their orthogonal direct sum, denoted byn⊕i=1
Hi is (h1, h2, ......, hn) : hi ∈ Hi.
5. SU(2)-Irreducibly Covariant Channels 102
Definition 5.2.1. Let H =n⊕i=1
Wi (resp. K =n⊕i=1
Vi) be the orthogonal direct sum of
Hilbert spaces Hi (resp. Ki ) for 1 ≤ i ≤ n, and φi : Wi −→ Vi, 1 ≤ i ≤ n be a
collection of linear maps. The orthogonal direct sum of φi : Wi −→ Vi, 1 ≤ i ≤ n,
denoted byn⊕i=1
φi is the map Φ : H −→ K defined by
Φ((h1, h2, ......, hn)) = (φ1 (h1) , φ2 (h2) , ......, φn (hn))
The proof of the next theorem is provided in the Appendix B.
Theorem 5.2.2. Let G be a group and H =r⊕t=1
Wt (resp. K =m⊕s=1
Vs ), where
Wt : 1 ≤ t ≤ r (resp. Vs : 1 ≤ s ≤ m ) are nonequivalent G-irreducible spaces.
Suppose there exists k ∈ N such that
1. For each 1 ≤ t ≤ k , Wt ' Vt via a G-equivariant isomorphism
ψt : Wt −→ Vt
2. For each t > k the subspace Wt is not equivalent to any of the Vs, for any
1 ≤ s ≤ m.
Then, for any G-equivariant map Φ : H −→ K, there exist λ1, λ2, ..., λk such
that Φ is the orthogonal direct sum of the operators λtψt : 1 ≤ t ≤ k
i.e.,
Φ =k⊕t=1
λtψt
Reminder:
Recall by Proposition 2.4.1 and Proposition 2.4.2, that for m ∈ N, the algebra
End(Pm) decomposes into mutually orthogonal subspaces U2t : 0 ≤ t ≤ m where
U2t = Vec∗mηm,m,m−tη∗m,m,m−tVecm(End(Pm)) = Vec∗mηm,m,m−t(P2t)
and where each matrix A2t in U2t corresponds to a unique vector v2t in P2t.
5. SU(2)-Irreducibly Covariant Channels 103
Lemma 5.2.3. Let r,m ∈ N. Let End(Pr) =r⊕t=0
U2t (resp. End(Pm) =m⊕s=0
U ′2s)
be the decomposition of End(Pr) (resp. End(Pm)) into SU(2)-irreducible invariant
subspaces. For any 0 ≤ t ≤ minm, r, the map
Vec∗mηm,m,m−tη∗r,r,r−tVecr
defines an SU(2)-isomorphism ψ2t : U2t −→ U ′2t. Moreover, both matrices A2t∈ U2t,
and ψ2t(A2t)∈ U ′2t correspond to the same vector in P2t.
Proof:
Let 0 ≤ t ≤ r and 0 ≤ s ≤ m, by Proposition 2.4.2, the SU(2)-irreducible
subspaces U2t and U ′2s are given via the equations U2t = Vec∗rηr,r,r−t(P2t), and U ′2s =
Vec∗mηm,m,m−s(P2s) respectively. For each 0 ≤ t ≤ minm, r, the map
ψ2t = Vec∗mηm,m,m−tη∗r,r,r−tVecr : U2t −→ U ′2t
is a nonzero SU(2)-equivariant map (note that η∗m,m,m−tηm,m,m−t = IP2t= η∗r,r,r−tηr,r,r−t,
so η∗r,r,r−t is onto and ηm,m,m−t 6= 0. Hence, the map ηm,m,m−tη∗r,r,r−t is nonzero). By
Schur’s Lemma 1.2.12, the map ψ2t is isomorphism. To show the second statement,
pick A2t ∈ U2t then v2t = η∗r,r,r−tVecr(A2t) is the vector in P2t corresponding to A2t,
and
ψ2t(A2t) = Vec∗mηm,m,m−tη∗r,r,r−tVecr(A2t) = Vec∗mηm,m,m−t(v2t)
is the matrix in U ′2t ⊆ End(Pm) corresponding to v2t.
Recall by Corollary 2.4.3 that any A ∈ End(Pr) can be decomposed into an
orthogonal direct sum of matrices. Namely A = (A0, A2, ....A2r) where A2t ∈ U2t. By
Theorem 5.2.2 and Lemma 5.2.3, we have
Corollary 5.2.4. Let r,m ∈ N. Let Φ : End(Pr) −→ End(Pm) be an SU(2)-
equivariant map. The map Φ can be written as an orthogonal direct sum of op-
erators. More precisely, there exist λ2t : 0 ≤ t ≤ minm, r, and operators
5. SU(2)-Irreducibly Covariant Channels 104
ψ2t = Vec∗mηm,m,m−tη
∗r,r,r−tVecr : 0 ≤ t ≤ minm, r
such that
Φ (A0 + A2 + ....+ A2r) =
minm,r∑t=0
λ2tψ2t(A2t)
for A0 + A2 + ....+ A2r ∈ End(Pr).
Remark 5.2.5. By Lemma 5.2.3, the matrix ψ2t(A2t) in Corollary 5.2.4 is computed
using the map Vecm∗ηm,m,m−tη
∗r,r,r−tVecr independently from the definition of the map
Φ, and depends only on m,r. i.e. all the information about the map Φ will be encoded
in the set of the numbers λ2t : 0 ≤ t ≤ minr,m.
The rest of this section is devoted to computing the numbers λ2t : 0 ≤ t ≤ minr,m
in Corollary 5.2.4 for the EPOSIC channel Φm,n,h. As Φm,n,h(A2t) = λ2tψ2t(A2t) for
any 0 ≤ t ≤ minr,m, we can find λ2t by evaluating both sides of Φm,n,h(A2t) =
λ2tψ2t(A2t) at some basic element of Pm. The big challenge is making a good choice
for the matrix A2t, the one that minimizes the computations. By Remark 2.4.7, the
matrix A2t that corresponds to the vector f 2tt is a diagonal matrix. Hoping for a good
choice, we choose this matrix to compute λ2t. This matrix is given by the formula
A2t =r∑j=0
(−1)jεjt (r,r,r−t)f rr−jfr∗r−j.
Proposition 5.2.6. Let m,n, h ∈ N with 0 ≤ h ≤ minm,n. Let Φm,n,h be the
associated EPOSIC channel, and r = m + n − 2h. For 0 ≤ t ≤ minm, r, the
coefficient λ2t is given by
λ2t =
r∑j=m−h
(−1)jεjt (r,r,r−t)(εr−j+hr−j (m,n,h)
)2
(−1)mεmt (m,m,m−t)
Proof:
Pick f 2tt ∈ P2t. By Remark 2.4.7, the matrix in End(Pr) that corresponds to f 2t
t
is
A2t =r∑j=0
(−1)jεjt (r,r,r−t)f rr−jfr∗
r−j
5. SU(2)-Irreducibly Covariant Channels 105
By Corollary 4.2.7,
Φm,n,h(fr
r−jfr∗
r−j)(fm
0 ) =
(εr−j+hr−j (m,n,h)
)2fm0 if r−j+h∈B(r−j)
0 else
=
(εr−j+hr−j (m,n,h)
)2fm0 if j≥m−h
0 else
Thus
Φm,n,h(A2t)(fm
0 ) =r∑j=0
(−1)jεjt (r,r,r−t)Φm,n,h(fr
r−jfr∗
r−j)(fm
0 )
=r∑
j=m−h
(−1)jεjt (r,r,r−t)(εr−j+hr−j (m,n,h)
)2fm0
By Remark 2.4.7, and Lemma 5.2.3, the matrix
ψ2t(A2t) =m∑j=0
(−1)jεjt (m,m,m−t)fmm−jfm∗
m−j
As by Corollary 5.2.4,
Φm,n,h(A2t) = λ2tψ2t(A2t)
we get
λ2t =
r∑j=m−h
(−1)jεjt (r,r,r−t)(εr−j+hr−j (m,n,h)
)2
(−1)mεmt (m,m,m−t)
For m ∈ N, and 0 ≤ t ≤ m, we have
εmt (m,m,m−t) = (−1)m−tm!√cm,m,m−t
Thus, the formula above for λ2t can simplified:
5. SU(2)-Irreducibly Covariant Channels 106
Corollary 5.2.7. Assuming the same hypothesis as in Proposition 5.2.6, the coeffi-
cient λ2t, is given by
λ2t =
r∑j=m−h
(−1)t+jεjt (r,r,r−t)(εr−j+hr−j (m,n,h)
)2
m!√cm,m,m−t
Next we compute the coefficients λ2t for some EPOSIC channels of small dimen-
sions such as EC(0,m), EC(m, 0), EC(1,m), and EC(m, 1). Before doing so, some
computational lemmas are needed, and can be proved easily using the equations in
Corollary 2.3.16 and the identitym∑k=1
k = m(m+1)2
.
Lemma 5.2.8. Let cm,n,h be as defined in Theorem 2.2.4. For m ∈ N, we have
cm,m,m = 1m!(m+1)!
c0,m,0 = 1(m!)2 cm,m+1,m = 2
m!(m+2)!
cm,m−1,m−1 = 2(m−1)!(m+1)!
c1,m−1,0 = 1m!(m−1)!
c1,m+1,1 = (m+1)m!(m+2)!
cm,m,m−1 = 3(m−1)!(m+2)!
c1,m+1,1 = (m+1)m!(m+2)!
c1,m−1,0 = 1m!(m−1)!
Lemma 5.2.9. Let m ∈ N. then
1. εj0(m,m,m) = (−1)j
√1
m+1, εm−j+1
m−j (1,m+1,1) = −√
m−j+1m+2
for 0 ≤ j ≤ m.
2. If m ≥ 1 , then
(a) εm−jm−j(1,m−1,0) =√
jm
for 1 ≤ j ≤ m.
(b) εj0(m,m−1,m−1) = (−1)j
√2(j+1)m(m+1)
for 0 ≤ j ≤ m− 1.
Example 5.2.10. Let m ∈ N.
1. For the channel Φm,m,m : End(P0) −→ End(Pm) the coefficient is λ0 = 1√m+1
.
2. For the channel Φ0,m,0 : End(Pm) −→ End(P0) the coefficient is λ0 =√m+ 1.
5. SU(2)-Irreducibly Covariant Channels 107
Proof:
1. By Corollary 5.2.7, we have λ0 =ε00(0,0,0)(εm0 (m,m,m))
2
m!√cm,m,m
.
As ε00(0,0,0) = 1, and εm0 (m,m,m) = (−1)m√
m+1, then by Lemma 5.2.8, we get
λ0 =
√m!(m+1)!
(m+1)!= 1√
m+1
2. By Corollary 5.2.7, we have
λ0 =
m∑j=0
(−1)jεj0(m,m,m)
(εm−jm−j(0,m,0)
)2
√c0,0,0
As εj0(m,m,m) = (−1)j√m+1
, εm−jm−j(0,m,0)= 1 and c0,0,0 = 1 then
λ0 =m∑j=0
1√m+1
=√m+ 1
Example 5.2.11. Let m ∈ N.
1. For the channel Φm,m+1,m : End(P1) −→ End(Pm) the coefficients are λ0 =√2
m+1and λ2 = −
√2m
3(m+1)(m+2).
2. For the channel Φm,m−1,m−1 : End(P1) −→ End(Pm) the coefficients are λ0 =√2
m+1and λ2 =
√2(m+2)
3m(m+1).
Proof:
For each of the channel Φm,m+1,m and Φm,m−1,m−1, we compute λ2t : t = 0, 1.
5. SU(2)-Irreducibly Covariant Channels 108
1. By Corollary 5.2.7, we have
λ2t =
1∑j=0
(−1)t+jεjt (1,1,1−t)(εm−j+1
1−j (m,m+1,m)
)2
m!√cm,m,m−t
For t = 0, 1. Thus
λ0 =
1∑j=0
(−1)jεj0(1,1,1)
(εm−j+1
1−j (m,m+1,m)
)2
m!√cm,m,m
and
λ2 =
1∑j=0
(−1)j+1εj1(1,1,0)
(εm−j+1
1−j (m,m+1,m)
)2
m!√cm,m,m−1
For 0 ≤ j ≤ 1, we have εm−j+11−j (m,m+1,m) = βm,m+1,m
1−j,m,m−j+1 = (−1)m
√2j!(m−j+1)!
(m+2)!, and
εj0(1,1,1) = (−1)j√2
, εj1(1,1,0) = 1√2, thus
λ0 =
√2
1∑j=0
j!(m−j+1)!
(m+2)!m!√cm,m,m
=√
2 (m+2)m!(m+2)!m!
√cm,m,m
=√
2m+1
and
λ2 =
√2
1∑j=0
(−1)j+1j!(m−j+1)!
m!(m+2)!√cm,m,m−1
=√
2 (−m)m!m!(m+2)!
√cm,m,m−1
= −√
2m3(m+1)(m+2)
2. Similarly, we have
λ2t =
1∑j=1
(−1)t+jεjt (1,1,1−t)(εm−j1−j (m,m−1,m−1)
)2
m!√cm,m,m−t
=(−1)t+1ε1
t (1,1,1−t) (εm−10 (m,m−1,m−1))2
m!√cm,m,m−t
Thus
5. SU(2)-Irreducibly Covariant Channels 109
λ0 =−ε1
0(1,1,1) (εm−10 (m,m−1,m−1))2
m!√cm,m,m
=√
2(m+1)!
√cm,m,m
=√
2m+1
and
λ2 =ε1
1 (1,1,0) (εm−10 (m,m−1,m−1))2
m!√cm,m,m−1
=√
2(m+1)!
√cm,m,m−1
=√
2(m+2)3m(m+1)
Example 5.2.12. Let m ∈ N.
1. For the channel Φ1,m+1,1 : End(Pm) −→ End(P1) the coefficients are λ0 =√m+1
2and λ2 = −
√m(m+1)6(m+2)
.
2. For the channel Φ1,m−1,0 : End(Pm) −→ End(P1) the coefficients are λ0 =√m+1
2and λ2 =
√(m+1)(m+2)
6m.
Proof:
1. As
λ2t =
m∑j=0
(−1)t+jεjt (m,m,m−t)(εm−j+1m−j (1,m+1,1)
)2
√c1,1,1−t
we have
λ0 =
m∑j=0
m−j+1
(m+2)√m+1
√c1,1,1
=
√2m∑j=0
m−j+1
(m+2)√m+1
=√
2(m+2)
√m+1
m+1∑j=1
j =√
m+12
and
λ2 =
m∑j=0
(−1)j+1εj1(m,m,m−1)
(εm−j+1m−j (1,m+1,1)
)2
√c1,1,0
=√
2m∑j=0
(−1)j+1(m−j+1)m+2
εj1(m,m,m−1)
5. SU(2)-Irreducibly Covariant Channels 110
= −√
6m∑j=0
(m−j+1)(m−2j)
(m+2)√m(m+1)(m+2)
(see Lemma 2.4.11).
That is
λ2 = − 1(m+2)
√6
m(m+1)(m+2)
m∑j=0
(m− j + 1)(m− 2j)
However
m∑j=0
(m− j + 1)(m− 2j) =m∑j=0
(m2 +m)− (3m+ 2)j + 2j2
= (m2 +m)(m+ 1)− (3m+ 2)m∑j=0
j + 2m∑j=0
j2
= (m2 +m)(m+ 1)− (3m+ 2)m∑j=0
j + 2m∑j=0
j2
= (m2 +m)(m+ 1)− (3m+ 2)m(m+1)2
+ 2m(m+1)(2m+1)6
= m(m+1)(m+2)6
Thus λ2 = −√
m(m+1)6(m+2)
.
2. As
λ2t =
m∑j=1
(−1)t+jεjt (m,m,m−t)(εm−jm−j(1,m−1,0)
)2
√c1,1,1−t
then
λ0 =
m∑j=1
(−1)jεj0(m,m,m)
(εm−jm−j(1,m−1,0)
)2
√c1,1,1
=√
2(m+1)
1m
m∑j=1
j =√
m+12
λ2 =
m∑j=1
(−1)j+1εj1(m,m,m−1)
(εm−jm−j(1,m−1,0)
)2
√c1,1,0
5. SU(2)-Irreducibly Covariant Channels 111
=√
2m
m∑j=1
(−1)j+1jεj1(m,m,m−1)
= −1m
√6
m(m+1)(m+2)
m∑j=1
j(m− 2j)
(see Lemma 2.4.11(2)),
As
m∑j=1
j(m− 2j) = mm∑j=1
j − 2m∑j=1
j2
= m m(m+1)2− 2 m(m+1)(2m+1)
6= −m(m+1)(m+2)
6
we get,
λ2 =
√(m+1)(m+2)
6m
Chapter 6
The Minimal Output Entropy and
The Entanglement Breaking
Property of Quantum Channels
6.1 The minimal output entropy of quantum chan-
nels
The existence of noise in all information processing systems affects the transmission of
information over a quantum channel. A well-known measure of a channel performance
is the Minimal Output Entropy (MOE). In this section, we give the definition of
minimal output entropy, and exhibit some of its properties.
Recall that if H is a Hilbert space, then D(H) denotes the set of all states of H,
i.e.
D(H) = % ∈ End(H) : % ≥ 0, tr(%) = 1
Definition 6.1.1. Let H be a Hilbert space. The von Neumann entropy is a map
113
6. The Minimal Output Entropy and The Entanglement Breaking Property ofQuantum Channels 114
defined on the state space of H as following
S : D(H) −→ R
S(%) = −tr(% log2%)
where % ∈ D(H).
Remark 6.1.2. For a state %, the von Neumann entropy S(%) =∑i
− λi log2 λi
where λii are the eigenvalues of %. By convention, 0 log2 0 = 0.
Recall that a pure state % of H is a rank one projection in End(H). i.e.
% = ww∗for some unit vector w ∈ H.
Theorem 6.1.3. [27, Thm.11.8, Thm.11.10, Sec.11.3.5]
1. The von Neumann entropy is a concave non-negative function, which is zero if
and only if the state is pure.
2. In a d dimensional Hilbert space H, the von Neumann entropy for a state of H
is at most log2 d. It is log2 d if and only if the state is the maximal mixed state
Idd
.
Lemma 6.1.4. [27, p.514] Let H and K be Hilbert spaces. For σ1⊗σ2 ∈ D(H⊗K),
we have
S(σ1 ⊗ σ2) = S(σ1) + S(σ2)
Definition 6.1.5. (The Minimal Output Entropy) Let H and K be Hilbert spaces,
and Φ : End(H) −→ End(K) be a quantum channel. The minimal output entropy
(MOE), is defined by
Smin(Φ) = minS(Φ(%)) : % is a pure state
where S is the von Neumann entropy.
6. The Minimal Output Entropy and The Entanglement Breaking Property ofQuantum Channels 115
Remark 6.1.6. In the definition of minimal output entropy [24, 25], the minimum
is taken over all the states in H. However, by the concavity of von Neumann entropy,
the minimal output entropy will be achieved on a pure state.
Notation 6.1.7. Let H and K be Hilbert spaces, and Φ : End(H) −→ End(K) be
a quantum channel with Kraus operators Tj : 1 ≤ j ≤ n. For a pure state % = ww∗
of H, let UΦ,% denote the set uj = Tjw : 1 ≤ j ≤ n.
Remark 6.1.8. With the notation of 6.1.7, for a channel Φ : End(H) −→ End(K),
and a pure state % = ww∗ of H, we have
Φ(ww∗) =n∑j=1
Tjwj (Tjw)∗ =n∑j=1
uju∗j
is a state of K. Hence, the set UΦ,% must contain a nonzero vector.
The following lemma can be proved easily by contradiction.
Lemma 6.1.9. Let H be a Hilbert space, and u, v are non zero vectors of H. If u
and v are linearly independent, then uu∗ and vv∗are linearly independent in End(H).
Proposition 6.1.10. Let H and K be Hilbert spaces, and Φ : End(H) −→ End(K)
be a quantum channel. Then
1. Smin(Φ) = 0 if and only if there exist a pure state % of H such that Φ(%) is a
pure state.
2. If for each pure state % of H, the set UΦ,% contains at least two linearly inde-
pendent vectors, then Smin(Φ) 6= 0.
Proof:
By continuity of the von Neumann entropy, and compactness of the set of states
[41, p.29], the minimum entropy is achieved. Thus, if Smin(Φ) = 0 then there is a
state % such that S(Φ(%)) = 0. By Theorem 6.1.3, Φ(%) is a pure state. The other
6. The Minimal Output Entropy and The Entanglement Breaking Property ofQuantum Channels 116
direction follows from the definition of Smin(Φ). To show the second statement, let %
be a pure state. Since the set UΦ,% has at least two linearly independent vectors, then
by Lemma 6.1.9, Φ(%) =∑
uj∈U%uju
∗j has rank at least two. Hence, Φ(%) is not pure for
any pure state %. The result follows from this and the first statement.
Recall the definition of separable and entangled states, given in Definition 3.2.5.
Proposition 6.1.11. Let H,K and E be Hilbert spaces.
1. If α : H −→ K ⊗ E is an isometry, then the state α%α∗ ∈ D(K ⊗ E) is a pure
state for any pure state % ∈ D(H).
2. Any separable pure state % ∈ D(K ⊗ E) is a product of pure states.
i.e. ∃σ1 ∈ P(K) and σ2 ∈ P(E) such that % = σ1 ⊗ σ2.
Proof:
Let % be a pure state. It straightforward to show that α%α∗ is a state, we also
have (α%α∗)2 = α%α∗α%α∗ = α%α∗, and (α%α∗)∗ = α%α∗. Thus α%α∗ is a projection,
moreover rank(α%α∗) ≤ minrank(α), rank(%), rank(α∗) ≤ rank(%) = 1. Since
there is no state with rank zero, the state α%α∗ must have rank one.
For the second statement, assume that % is a pure state such that % =∑k
λk%k, a
convex combination of product states %k. Since any pure state is an extreme point
in the set of the states [41, p.29], % = %k for each k. That is % = σ1 ⊗ σ2 for some
σ1 ∈ D(K) and σ2 ∈ D(E). By Theorem 6.1.3, and Lemma 6.1.4, we have
0 = S(%) = S(σ1) + S(σ2)
hence S(σ1) = S(σ2) = 0, and both σ1, and σ2 are pure.
6. The Minimal Output Entropy and The Entanglement Breaking Property ofQuantum Channels 117
Corollary 6.1.12. Let H,K and E be Hilbert spaces, and Φ : End(H) −→ End(K)
be a quantum channel with Stinespring representation (E,α). If Φ has nonzero min-
imal output entropy then for any pure state % ∈ D(H), the state α%α∗ ∈ D(K ⊗ E)
is entangled.
Proof:
Let % be a pure state, and assume to the contrary that α%α∗ is a separable state.
By Proposition 6.1.11, there exist pure states σ1 ∈ P(K), σ2 ∈ P(E) such that
α%α∗ = σ1 ⊗ σ2. Consequently, Φ(%) = TrE(α%α∗) = TrE(σ1 ⊗ σ2) = σ1 is pure. By
Proposition 6.1.10, we get Smin(Φ) = 0.
6.2 The entanglement breaking property of quan-
tum channels
A property of quantum channels that has been studied, and used to classify them is
the elimination of entanglement between the input states of composite systems, see
Definition 3.2.5. Channels having this property are called Entanglement Breaking.
Here is a description by P. Shor [34] of the entanglement breaking channels.
“ Entanglement breaking channels are channels which destroy entangle-
ment with other quantum systems. That is, when the input state is en-
tangled between the input space Hin and another quantum system Href ,
the output of the channel is no longer entangled with the system Href .”
Recall that by Definition 3.2.5, the separable state in a composite system is a
convex combination of product states.
Definition 6.2.1. Let H and K be Hilbert spaces, and Φ : End(H) −→ End(K) be
a completely positive map. We say Φ is entanglement breaking if Φ⊗ In(%) is always
6. The Minimal Output Entropy and The Entanglement Breaking Property ofQuantum Channels 118
separable for any % ∈ D(H ⊗ Cn), and for any n ∈ N. An entanglement breaking
trace preserving map is abbreviated as E.B.T.
One checks easily (see [20, Thm.3]) that the set of entanglement breaking chan-
nels is a convex set. For a completely positive map Φ, it is evident that the state
Φ⊗ In(%) is separable for any separable state %, so Φ will be entanglement breaking
if Φ ⊗ In maps any entangled state to a separable one. The next proposition is due
to [20, Thm.4], see also [16, Pro.6.22, Pro.6.32].
Proposition 6.2.2. Let H and K be Hilbert spaces. If Φ : End(H) −→ End(K) is
a completely positive map, then the following statements are equivalent
1. Φ is entanglement breaking;
2. Φ⊗ In(uu∗) is separable, where u = 1√dH
dH∑i=1
ei ⊗ ej, and ei : 1 ≤ i ≤ dH is an
orthonormal basis for H;
3. Φ can be written in operator sum form using only Kraus operators of rank one.
Recall the definition of the Choi-Jamiolkowski map, given in 1.2.26. By Lemma
1.2.30, we have Φ⊗ In(uu∗) = 1dHC(Φ), where u = 1√
dH
dH∑i=1
ei ⊗ ei.
Corollary 6.2.3. Let H and K be Hilbert spaces, and Φ : End(H) −→ End(K) be a
completely positive map. The map Φ is entanglement breaking if and only if 1dHC(Φ)
is separable, where C(Φ) is the Choi matrix of Φ.
The proof of the next lemma requires knowledge of the entanglement distillation,
and its relation with separability, see [22], and the introduction in [4]. Assuming this,
the next lemma follows from [21, Thm.1].
Lemma 6.2.4. Let H and K be Hilbert spaces. For % ∈ D(H⊗K), let %H = TrK(%),
and %K = TrH(%) be the reduced density operators of % on the subsystems H and K
respectively. If rank(%) < maxrank(%H), rank(%K), then % is not separable.
6. The Minimal Output Entropy and The Entanglement Breaking Property ofQuantum Channels 119
The next proposition follows from Lemma 6.2.4, and Corollary 6.2.3. Recall that
if Φ is a quantum channel Φ, then by Theorem 3.2.20, we have TrK(C(Φ)) = IH.
Proposition 6.2.5. Let H and K be Hilbert spaces of dimension dH and dK respec-
tively. Let Φ : End(H)→ End(K) be a quantum channel with Choi matrix C(Φ). If
rank (C(Φ)) < maxdH, rank(TrH(C(Φ))) then Φ is not E.B.T
The following statement, which is generalization of Theorem 6 of [20], is a corol-
lary of both Proposition 6.2.5, and Corollary 3.2.23.
Corollary 6.2.6. Let H and K be Hilbert spaces of dimension dH and dK respectively.
If Φ : End(H) → End(K) is a quantum channel, which can be written using Kraus
operators fewer than maxdH, rank(TrH(C(Φ)) then Φ is not E.B.T.
Recall by Proposition 4.5.4 that if Ti : 1 ≤ i ≤ d are Kraus operators of a
completely positive map Φ, then T ∗i : 1 ≤ i ≤ d are Kraus operators of its dual
map Φ∗.
Proposition 6.2.7. Let H and K be Hilbert spaces, and Φ : End(H) −→ End(K)
be a completely positive map. The map Φ is entanglement breaking if and only if its
dual map Φ∗ is entanglement breaking.
Proof:
Assume that Φ is entanglement breaking, so by Proposition 6.2.2, there exist
Kraus operators Tj : 1 ≤ j ≤ k of Φ such that rank(Tj) = 1 for all 1 ≤ j ≤ k.
Since Tj = uv∗ ⇐⇒ T ∗j = vu∗, then By Proposition 4.5.4, the map Φ∗ has Kraus op-
erators T ∗i : 1 ≤ i ≤ d such that rank(T ∗j ) = 1. Hence, it is entanglement breaking.
By exchanging the role of Φ and Φ∗, the result follows.
6. The Minimal Output Entropy and The Entanglement Breaking Property ofQuantum Channels 120
6.3 The additivity of the classical capacity of quan-
tum channels
In this section, we justify the importance of studying the minimal output en-
tropy, and the E.B.T property for a quantum channel. This section can be skipped
with no impact on the rest of the thesis. The channel’s capacity is defined to be the
maximal rate of reliable communication through a channel [27, p.547]. In [2] Bennett
and Shor classified three distinct capacities of a quantum channel. One of the impor-
tant open questions is that of determining the capability of the channel to transmit
classical information, which is known as the classical capacity of the channel. The
Holevo capacity (product state capacity) is defined to be the classical capacity for
the channel with the restriction that there are no entangled input states are allowed
across many uses of the channel, see [27, p.554]. A fundamental result of quantum
information theory, “The quantum coding theorem” [18], and [32], implies that the
classical capacity of a quantum channel Φ is given by
limn→∞
Cχ(Φ⊗n)
n
where Cχdenotes the Holevo capacity.
In their attempts to increase the capacity of quantum channels, scientists studied
whether running two channels in parallel will increase the total classical capacity of
the two channels. Failing to do so, the capacity is called additive. In general, we have
the following definition:
Definition 6.3.1. Let Q : Φ : Φ is a quantum channel −→ R be a map defined
on the set of quantum channels. Then Q is said to be additive if
Q(Φ1 ⊗ Φ2) = Q(Φ1) +Q(Φ2)
for all quantum channels Φ1 and Φ2.
6. The Minimal Output Entropy and The Entanglement Breaking Property ofQuantum Channels 121
If the Holevo capacity is additive, then for the independent use for many copies
of a quantum channel Φ, we have Cχ(Φ⊗n) = n · Cχ(Φ). This implies the coincidence
between the classical capacity and Holevo capacity, and consequently implies the
additivity of the classical capacity. The following proposition is an outstanding result
of P. Shor in [36].
Proposition 6.3.2. The Holevo capacity Cχ is additive if and only if the minimal
output entropy Smin is additive.
A conjecture that lasted many years was that the Holevo capacity is additive.
Much research effort was directed to prove this conjecture, and for some special
classes of quantum channels the additivity of minimal output entropy was proved.
For example, tensoring the identity with any channel [1], the unital qubit channel
[24], the depolarizing quantum channel [26], the phase damping channels [26], and
the entanglement breaking channels [34]. However, an outstanding paper in 2008
by Hastings [11] disproved this conjecture. By giving a randomized construction of
channels that violate the additivity of the minimal output entropy, he was able to
show the existence of a channel Φ such that Smin(Φ ⊗ Φ) 6= Smin(Φ) + Smin(Φ).
Since then, the efforts redirected towards constructing an explicit example for the
non-additivity of the minimal output entropy.
Proposition 6.3.3. [17] For an independent use of quantum channels, the minimal
output entropy is sub-additive. That is, if Φ1,Φ2 are two quantum channels that are
used independently, then
Smin(Φ1 ⊗ Φ2) ≤ Smin(Φ1) + Smin(Φ2)
The following proposition summarizes some results in both [15, p.95] and [34].
It presents special cases where the additivity of MOE holds.
6. The Minimal Output Entropy and The Entanglement Breaking Property ofQuantum Channels 122
Proposition 6.3.4. Let Φ be a quantum channel such that Smin(Φ) = 0 or Φ is an
E.B.T channel. Then, for any arbitrary channel Ψ, we have
Smin(Φ⊗Ψ) = Smin(Ψ⊗ Φ) = Smin(Φ) + Smin(Ψ)
Chapter 7
The Minimal Output Entropy and
The Entanglement Breaking
Property of EPOSIC Channels
The main results of this chapter:
• Proving that the minimal output entropy of EPOSIC channel is zero if only and
only if the index h in Φm,n,h is zero (Proposition 7.1.1, and Corollary 7.1.7).
• Computing Smin(Φm,1,1) for m ∈ N (Corollary 7.2.6).
• Finding a lower bound of the minimal output entropy of an element inQC(P1, Pm)SU(2)
(Proposition 7.2.13).
• Examining the E.B.T property of EPOSIC channels (Section 7.3).
123
7. The Minimal Output Entropy and The Entanglement Breaking Property ofEPOSIC Channels 124
7.1 The minimal output entropy of EPOSIC chan-
nel
In this section, we determine the EPOSIC channels with zero minimal output entropy.
Recall that for m ∈ N, the channel Φm,0,0 is the identity channel on End(Pm), and
the channel Φ0,m,0 : End(Pm) −→ End(P0) is given by Φ0,m,0(A) = tr(A). As both
takes a pure state to a pure state, both have a zero minimal output entropy. More
generally, we have the following proposition:
Proposition 7.1.1. For m,n ∈ N, the channel Φm,n,0 has zero minimal output en-
tropy.
Proof:
By Corollary 4.2.7, we have
Φm,n,0(f r0 fr∗
0 ) =0∑j=0
(εj0(m,n,,0))2 fml0jfm∗
l0j= fm0 f
m∗
0
where r = m+n, and fki : 0 ≤ i ≤ k is the standard basis for Pk, k ∈ N. The result
follows by Proposition 6.1.10.
Next, we show that the minimal output entropy of Φm,n,h is not zero if h > 0. The
following lemma can be proved by direct computation using the formula in Corollary
2.3.13.
εji (m,n,h) =
minh,j,j+m−i−h∑s=max0,j−i,j+h−n
βm,n,hi,s,j
Lemma 7.1.2. For m,n, h ∈ N with 0 ≤ h ≤ minm,n and j ∈ B(i), let εji :=
εji (m,n,h) and r = m+ n− 2h, then we have:
1. ε0i 6= 0, for 0 ≤ i ≤ m− h;
2. εi−m+h
i 6= 0, for m− h ≤ i ≤ r;
7. The Minimal Output Entropy and The Entanglement Breaking Property ofEPOSIC Channels 125
3. εi+hi 6= 0, for 0 ≤ i ≤ n− h;
4. εni 6= 0, for n− h ≤ i ≤ r.
Lemma 7.1.3. Let m,n, h ∈ N with 0 < h ≤ minm,n, and r = m + n − 2h. For
any 0 ≤ i ≤ m+ n− 2h, we have
max0,−m+ i+ h < mini+ h, n.
Proof:
Let
j1 = max0,−m+ i+ h =
0 if 0 ≤ i ≤ m− h
i−m+ h if m− h ≤ i ≤ r
and
j2 = mini+ h, n =
i+ h if 0 ≤ i ≤ n− h
n if n− h ≤ i ≤ r
If j1 = 0, then j1 < h ≤ j2. Otherwise,
j1 = i− (m− h) ≤ mini, r −m+ h = mini, n− h < mini+ h, n = j2
Recall the definition of B(i) = j : max0,−m+ i+ h ≤ j ≤ mini + h, n
in Notation 2.3.10.
Corollary 7.1.4. For m,n, h ∈ N with 0 < h ≤ minm,n, let r = m+ n− 2h. For
each 0 ≤ i ≤ r, there exist j1, j2 ∈ B(i) such that j1 < j2, and
εj1i 6= 0, εj2i 6= 0
7. The Minimal Output Entropy and The Entanglement Breaking Property ofEPOSIC Channels 126
Proof:
Let j1 = max0,−m+ i+ h and j2 = mini+ h, n. Both j1, j2 ∈ B(i), and by
Lemma 7.1.3 we have j1 < j2. By Lemma 7.1.2, both εj1i 6= 0 and εj2i 6= 0.
Recall by Remark 4.2.3 that EPOSIC Kraus operators of Φm,n,h are given by
Tj =
minr,m+j−h∑i=max0,j−h
εji fm
lijf r∗i
for 0 ≤ j ≤ n. Recall also by Notation 6.1.7, that for a quantum channel Φ with
Kraus operators Tj : 1 ≤ j ≤ n, and for a pure state % = ww∗ of H, the set UΦ,%
denotes the vectors uj = Tjw : 1 ≤ j ≤ n. The proof of the following lemma is via
direct computation.
Lemma 7.1.5. Let m,n, h ∈ N with 0 ≤ h ≤ minm,n, r = m + n − 2h, and
Tj : 0 ≤ j ≤ n be the EPOSIC Kraus operators of Φm,n,h. For w =m+n−2h∑i=0
wifri ∈
Pm+n−2h, we have
Tjw =
minr,m−h+j∑i=max0,j−h
wiεjif
m
i−j+h
Proposition 7.1.6. Let m,n, h ∈ N with 0 < h ≤ minm,n, and Φm,n,h be the
associated EPOSIC channel. For any pure state % ∈ End(Pm+n−2h), the set UΦm,n,h,%
contains at least two linearly independent vectors.
Proof:
Let r = m + n − 2h and % be any pure state in End(Pr). By Remark 3.2.4,
% = ww∗ for some unit vector w ∈ Pr. i.e
w =r∑i=0
wifr
i ,
r∑i=0
|wi|2 = 1
Pick i1 minimal so that wi1 6= 0. By Corollary 7.1.4, there exist j1 < j2 ∈ B(i1) such
that εj1i1 6= 0 and εj2i1 6= 0. Since j ∈ B(i1)⇐⇒ max0, j−h ≤ i1 ≤ minr,m−h+j,
7. The Minimal Output Entropy and The Entanglement Breaking Property ofEPOSIC Channels 127
then by Lemma 7.1.5, we have
uj1 = Tj1w =
minr,m−h+j1∑i=max0,j1−h
wiεj1i f
m
i−j1+h 6= 0
and
uj2 = Tj2w =
minr,m−h+j2∑i=max0,j2−h
wiεj2i f
m
i−j2+h 6= 0
If UΦm,n,h,% = uj : 0 ≤ j ≤ n doesn’t contain two linearly independent vectors, then
there exist α 6= 0 such that uj2 = αuj1 . In particular, comparing the coefficients of
fmi1−j2+h, we obtain
0 6= wi1εj2i1
= αwi2εj1i2
for some i2, where i1 − j2 + h = i2 − j1 + h. i.e. i2 = i1 − (j2 − j1) < i1 and wi2 6= 0,
contradicting the minimality of i1.
The following corollary follows directly from the last proposition and Proposition
6.1.10.
Corollary 7.1.7. Let m,n,h∈ N with 0 h ≤ minm,n. Then Smin(Φm,n,h) is
nonzero.
By the last corollary and Corollary 6.1.12, we have:
Corollary 7.1.8. Let m,n,h∈ N with 0 h ≤ minm,n. For any pure state % ∈
D(Pm+n−2h), the state αm,n,h%α∗m,n,h ∈ D(Pm ⊗ Pn) is a pure entangled.
7.2 Examples and special cases
In this section, we give a systematic method to compute the minimal output entropy
of Φm,n,n, for m,n ∈ N, and compute Smin(Φm,1,1). We also give a bound for Smin(Φ),
where Φ : End(P1) −→ End(Pm) is an SU(2)-irreducibly covariant channel.
7. The Minimal Output Entropy and The Entanglement Breaking Property ofEPOSIC Channels 128
7.2.1 The minimal output entropy of Φm,1,1
Lemma 7.2.1. Let K be a finite dimensional Hilbert space, and A ∈ End(K) such
that A =n∑j=1
uju∗j . If uj : 1 ≤ j ≤ n are linearly independent vectors in K, then
there exist a basis for K such that the matrix represents A is in the form
〈u1 |u1 〉 〈u1 |u2 〉 · · · 〈u1 |un 〉 0 · · · 0
〈u2 |u1 〉 〈u2 |u2 〉 · · · 〈u2 |un 〉 0 · · · 0...
......
......
......
......
...
〈un |u1 〉 〈un |u2 〉 · · · 〈un |un 〉 0 · · · 0
0 0 0 0 · · · 0...
......
......
0 0 0 0 · · · 0
A matrix in a such form is called Gram matrix.
Proof:
Let un+1, un+2, ....udk be a basis for the orthogonal subspace on spanuj : 1 ≤
j ≤ n and U =u1, u2, ..., un, un+1, ....udk
. The set U forms a basis for K. For each
uk ∈ U , we have
Auk =n∑j=1
uju∗j (uk) =
n∑j=1
〈uj |uk 〉uj if 1 ≤ k ≤ n
0 if k > n
The result follows by writing the matrix for A with respect to the basis U .
Corollary 7.2.2. Let m,n ∈ N with n ≤ m, and % be a pure state of Pm−n. The
matrix representing Φm,n,n(%) is in the form of a Gram matrix.
7. The Minimal Output Entropy and The Entanglement Breaking Property ofEPOSIC Channels 129
Proof:
Let Tj : 0 ≤ j ≤ n be the EPOSIC Kraus operators of Φm,n,n : End(Pm−n) −→
End(Pm), and % = ww∗ where w is a unit vector in Pm−n. By Remark 6.1.8,
Φm,n,n(%) = Φm,n,n(ww∗) =n∑j=0
uju∗j
where uj = Tjw . By Lemma 7.1.5,
uj = Tjw =m−n∑i=0
wiεjif
m
i−j+n =
m−j∑k=n−j
wk+j−nεjk+j−nf
m
k
where εji = εji (m,n,n). As the coefficients εji (m,n,n) are nonzero (Corollary 2.3.15 (6)), it
is clear that the set uj : 0 ≤ j ≤ n is linearly independent. The result follows by
Lemma 7.2.1.
Theoretically, we are now able to compute the minimal output entropy for Φm,n,n
by computing the eigenvalues of the Gram matrix of Φm,n,n(%) for any pure state %,
see Definition 6.1.5, and Remark 6.1.2. Due to the complicated computations, we
only find the minimal output entropy of Φm,1,1. Recall that for m ∈ N r 0, the
channel Φm,1,1 : End(Pm−1) −→ End(Pm) has only two EPOSIC Kraus operators
T0, T1, where Tj : Pm−1 −→ Pm, j = 1, 2 as given in Definition 4.2.1. Let % = ww∗
be a pure state in End(Pm−1), and u0 = T0w, u1 = T1w. By Corollary 7.2.2, there is
exist a basis for Pm such that the matrix Φm,1,1(%) is given by
〈u0 |u0 〉 〈u0 |u1 〉 0 · · · 0
〈u1 |u0 〉 〈u1 |u1 〉 0 · · · 0
0 0 0 · · · 0...
......
...
0 0 0 · · · 0
Using the same notation above, we have
7. The Minimal Output Entropy and The Entanglement Breaking Property ofEPOSIC Channels 130
Proposition 7.2.3. Let m ∈ N r 0 and ww∗ be a pure state in End(Pm−1). The
eigenvalues of Φm,1,1(ww∗) are 0, λ1, λ2, where
λ1,2 =1±√
1− 4R
2
with R = ‖u0‖2 ‖u1‖2 − |〈u0 |u1 〉|2.
The proof of the following lemma is purely computational, and is provided in
Appendix B.
Lemma 7.2.4. Let m ∈ N r 0. Using the above notations, the minimal value of
‖u0‖2 ‖u1‖2 − |〈u0 |u1 〉|2 is m(m+1)2 .
Remark 7.2.5. Using Cauchy Schwartz inequality and Lemma 7.2.4, we have
0 ≤ 1−4R ≤ 1 holds for any m ≥ 1 which affirms that λ1,2 are non-negative numbers.
By concavity of von Neumann entropy [27, p.516] and [41, Prop.13.4], we have
that the von Neumann entropy of Φm,1,1(ww∗) achieves its minimum when the dif-
ference between λ1 and λ2 is maximal, this is when R is minimal. Consequently, by
Remark 6.1.2, we get:
Corollary 7.2.6. Let m ∈ Nr 0. Then
Smin(Φm,1,1) = −[1
m+1log2
1
m+1+
m
m+1log2
m
m+1]
with the minimal output entropy achieved at the state % = fm−10 fm−1∗
0 .
7.2.2 Lower bound of the minimal output entropy of an ele-
ment in QC(P1, Pm)SU(2)
Recall that the set QC(P1, Pm)SU(2) consists of all SU(2)-irreducibly covariant chan-
nels Φ : End(P1) −→ End(Pm), and it is the convex hull of the EPOSIC channels
7. The Minimal Output Entropy and The Entanglement Breaking Property ofEPOSIC Channels 131
EC(1,m) (Proposition 5.1.2). In this subsection, we find a lower bound of the min-
imal output entropy for these channels assuming m ≥ 5. We begin by recalling
some results from Chapter 4. The following lemma is a reformulation of the result in
Lemma 4.6.1.
Lemma 7.2.7. Let m∈ N and Φ : End(P1) −→ End(Pm) be an SU(2)-equivariant
map. For a unit vector w in P1, the states Φ(ww∗) and Φ(f 10 f
1∗0 ) have the same
eigenvalues.
Corollary 7.2.8. Let m ∈ N and Φ : End(P1) −→ End(Pm) be an SU(2)-covariant
channel. Then
Smin(Φ) = S(Φ(f 1
0 f1∗
0 ))
By Lemma 4.6.2, we have
Example 7.2.9. Let m ∈ Nr 0. Then
1. Smin(Φm,m+1,m) = −m+1∑j=1
2j(m+1)(m+2)
log22j
(m+1)(m+2).
2. Smin(Φm,m−1,m−1) = −m∑j=1
2jm(m+1)
log22j
m(m+1).
Proposition 7.2.10. Let m ∈ Nr0, and Φ : End(P1) −→ End(Pm) be an SU(2)-
covariant channel. There exists 0 ≤ p ≤ 1 such that the eigenvalues of Φ(f 10 f
1∗0 )
are λj = 2(m−j+1)
(m+1)(m+2)p+ 2j
m(m+1)(1− p), 0 ≤ j ≤ m
.
Proof:
Since Φ ∈ QC(P1, Pm)SU(2), then by Proposition 5.1.2, there exists 0 ≤ p ≤ 1
such that
Φ = pΦm,m+1,m + (1− p)Φm,m−1,m−1
By linearity of Φ, and by Lemma 4.6.2, we have
Φ(f 1
0 f1∗
0 ) = pΦm,m+1,m(f 1
0 f1∗
0 ) + (1− p)Φm,m−1,m−1(f 1
0 f1∗
0 )
7. The Minimal Output Entropy and The Entanglement Breaking Property ofEPOSIC Channels 132
= 2pm+2
fmm fm∗m +
m∑j=1
[2p(m−j+1)
(m+1)(m+2)+ 2(1−p)j
m(m+1)
]fmm−jf
m∗
m−j
=m∑j=0
[2p(m−j+1)
(m+1)(m+2)+ 2(1−p)j
m(m+1)
]fmm−jf
m∗
m−j
By the above proposition, Corollary 7.2.8, and Remark 6.1.2, we have
Corollary 7.2.11. Let m ∈ N, and Φ : End(P1) −→ End(Pm) be an SU(2)-covariant
channel. There exists 0 ≤ p ≤ 1 such that
Smin(Φ) = −m∑j=0
λj log2 λj
where λj = 2(m−j+1)(m+1)(m+2)
p+ 2jm(m+1)
(1− p).
Remark 7.2.12. The map −x lnx is increasing on [0, 1e], and its integral x2
4− x2 lnx
2
is an increasing map on [0, 1]. Recall that by convention, 0 ln 0 = 0.
Proposition 7.2.13. Let m ∈ N such that m ≥ 5, and Φ : End(P1) −→ End(Pm) be
an SU(2)-covariant channel. Then
Smin(Φ) ≥ 14ln2
(m−2)2
m2(m+1)2
Proof:
By Corollary 7.2.11,
Smin(Φ) = −1ln 2
m∑j=0
λj lnλj
where
λj = 2(m−j+1)(m+1)(m+2)
p+ 2jm(m+1)
(1−p).
Let f(x) = −x lnx, g(x) =∫f(x)dx = x2
4− x2 lnx
2, xj = 2(m−j+1)
(m+1)(m+2), and yj = 2j
m(m+1).
As
xj ≤ 2(m+1)(m+1)(m+2)
= 2m+2
and yj ≤ 2mm(m+1)
= 2m+1
. For m ≥ 5, we have
0 ≤ minxj, yj ≤ pxj + (1− p)yj ≤ maxxj, yj ≤ 2m+1≤ 1
3< 1
e
7. The Minimal Output Entropy and The Entanglement Breaking Property ofEPOSIC Channels 133
Thus, by Remark 7.2.12,
f (minxj, yj) ≤ f (pxj + (1− p)yj)
As minxj, yj = yj if and only if j ≤ m2
, and f (pxj + (1− p)yj) ≥ 0 for any j, we
have
ln 2 · Smin(Φ) =m∑j=0
f (pxj + (1− p)yj) ≥bm2 c∑j=0
f (pxj + (1− p)yj)
≥bm2 c∑j=0
f (minxj, yj) =
bm2 c∑j=0
f(
2jm(m+1)
)=
bm2 c∑j=1
f(
2jm(m+1)
)As for x ∈ [0,
⌊m2
⌋], we have 0 ≤ 2x
m(m+1)≤ 1
e. Then for j ∈ [0,
⌊m2
⌋], we have
f(
2jm(m+1)
)=
j∫j−1
f(
2jm(m+1)
)dx ≥
j∫j−1
f(
2xm(m+1)
)dx.
Consequently,
ln 2 · Smin(Φ) ≥bm2 c∑j=1
j∫j−1
f(
2xm(m+1)
)dx =
bm2 c∫0
f(
2xm(m+1)
)dx.
To compute the right hand side, let u = 2xm(m+1)
then
bm2 c∫0
f(
2xm(m+1)
)dx = m(m+1)
2
2bm2 cm(m+1)∫
0
(−u lnu) du = g( 2bm2 cm(m+1)
)− g(0)
but
g( 2bm2 cm(m+1)
) ≥ g( 2(m2 −1)
m(m+1)) = g( m−2
m(m+1)) = ( m−2
m(m+1))2
[14−
ln( m−2m(m+1))
2
]Since m−2
m(m+1)< 1, then g( m−2
m(m+1)) > 1
4
(m−2
m(m+1)
)2
. Thus
Smin(Φ) ≥ 14 ln 2
(m−2
m(m+1)
)2
.
7. The Minimal Output Entropy and The Entanglement Breaking Property ofEPOSIC Channels 134
7.3 The entanglement breaking property of EPOSIC
channels
The present section examines the E.B.T property of EPOSIC channel. The E.B.T
property of a quantum channel was reviewed in Section 6.2.
Proposition 7.3.1. For m ∈ N, the channel Φm,m,m and Φ0,m,0 are E.B.T channels.
Proof:
Let Tj : 0 ≤ j ≤ m be the EPOSIC Kraus operator of Φm,m,m. By Remark
4.2.3 (1), we have rank(Tj) ≤ 1 (since r = 0). Thus, Φm,m,m can be written in Kraus
representation using only rank one operators. By Proposition 6.2.2, Φm,m,m is E.B.T.
We also have Φ0,m,0 = (m+ 1)Φ∗m,m,m is an E.B.T channel (see Proposition 6.2.7, and
Proposition 4.5.6).
Since the set of entanglement breaking maps is a convex set [20, Th.3] then by
Proposition 5.1.2, we have:
Corollary 7.3.2. For m ∈ N, let Φ : End(P0) −→ End(Pm) and Ψ : End(Pm) −→
End(P0) be SU(2)-covariant channels. The maps Φ and Ψ are E.B.T channels.
The following proposition determines some special cases where the EPOSIC chan-
nels are not E.B.T. Recall that the EPOSIC channel Φm,n,h has exactly (n + 1)
EPOSIC Kraus operators (Definition 4.2.1).
Proposition 7.3.3. Let m,n, h ∈ N with 0 ≤ h ≤ minm,n. If m > minn, 2h
then Φm,n,h : End(Pm+n−2h) −→ End(Pm) is not E.B.T. In particular, Φm,h,h is not
E.B.T for any 0 ≤ h < m.
Proof:
7. The Minimal Output Entropy and The Entanglement Breaking Property ofEPOSIC Channels 135
Assume that m > minn, 2h. If n ≥ 2h, then dim(Pm+n−2h) ≥ dim(Pm). Hence
n+ 1 < m+ 1 ≤ dim(Pm+n−2h) = maxdim(Pm+n−2h), rank(TrPm+n−2h(C(Φm,n,h)))
The result follows by Corollary 6.2.6, and the fact that Φm,n,h has (n + 1) EPOSIC
Kraus operators. If n ≤ 2h, then n ≥ 2(n−h). Since m+n−2h > minn, 2(n−h),
then by Proposition 4.5.6, and the first case, we get that the channel
Φm+n−2h,n,n−h = m+n−2h+1m+1
Φ∗m,n,h
is not E.B.T. The result follows by Proposition 6.2.7.
Chapter 8
The Minimal Output Entropy of
the Tensor Product of
SU(2)-Irreducibly Covariant
Channels
There are very few tools that can be used to understand the minimal output entropy
of the tensor product of two channels in general. In this chapter, we restrict ourselves
to the SU(2)-irreducibly covariant channels, and obtain a bound on the minimal
output entropy for the tensor product of two of such channels.
The main results of this chapter:
• Obtaining a bound on the minimal output entropy for the tensor product of
two SU(2)-irreducibly covariant channels (Corollary 8.2.4).
136
8. The Minimal Output Entropy of the Tensor Product of SU(2)-IrreduciblyCovariant Channels 137
8.1 The tensor product of SU(2)-irreducibly co-
variant channels.
For i = 1, 2, let Hi, Ki be Hilbert spaces, and Φi ∈ End (End(Hi), End(Ki)). Recall
that Φ1⊗Φ2, the tensor product of Φ1 and Φ2, is the endomorphism from End(H1⊗
H2) to End(K1 ⊗K2) such that
Φ1 ⊗ Φ2 (A1 ⊗ A2) = Φ1(A1)⊗ Φ2(A2)
for Ai ∈ End(Hi), i = 1, 2.
Notation 8.1.1. Let H be Hilbert space such that H =m⊕i=1
Wi, and Wi are subspaces
of H. Let P be the set of the corresponding orthogonal projections qi : 1 ≤ i ≤ m.
In this chapter, EP will denote the map EP : End(H) −→m⊕i=1
End(Wi) defined by
EP(A) =m∑i=1
qiAq∗i
For i = 1, 2, and ri,mi ∈ N, let Pri (resp. Pmi) be the SU(2)-irreducible Hilbert
space of dimension ri+1 (resp. mi+1). Let Pr1⊗Pr2 =minr1,r2⊕
k=0
Vk (resp. Pm1⊗Pm2
=
minm1,m2⊕l=0
Wl ) be the decomposition of Pr1⊗Pr2 (resp. Pm1⊗Pm2
) into a direct sum of
S(2)-irreducible subspaces. By Proposition 1.2.5, Proposition 3.3.6, and Proposition
3.3.8, we have
Proposition 8.1.2. With the notation above, if Φi : End(Pri) −→ End(Pmi), i = 1, 2
are SU(2)-covariant channels, then
1. For 0 ≤ k ≤ minr1, r2, the restriction of Φ1 ⊗ Φ2 to End(Vk)
Φ1 ⊗ Φ2 |End(Vk) : End(Vk) −→ End(Pm1⊗ Pm2
)
is an SU(2)-covariant channel.
8. The Minimal Output Entropy of the Tensor Product of SU(2)-IrreduciblyCovariant Channels 138
2. If P = ql : 0 ≤ l ≤ minm1,m2 is the set of orthogonal projections of
Pm1⊗ Pm2
on the SU(2)-irreducible subspaces Wl, then the map
EP (Φ1 ⊗ Φ2 |End(Vk)) : End(Vk) −→minm1,m2⊕
l=0
End(Wl)
is an SU(2)-covariant channel.
Proposition 8.1.3. Let EP (Φ1 ⊗ Φ2 |End(Vk)) be the channel given in Proposition
8.1.2. For each 0 ≤ k ≤ minr1, r2, we have:
EP (Φ1 ⊗ Φ2 |End(Vk)) =
minm1,m2∑l=0
λk,lψk,l
where for 0 ≤ l ≤ minm1,m2, the map ψk,l : End(Vk) −→ End(Wl) is an SU(2)-
irreducibly covariant channel, and λk,l : 0 ≤ l ≤ minm1,m2 are non-negative real
numbers withmin(m1,m2∑
l=0
λk,l = 1.
Proof:
The map
ql (Φ1 ⊗ Φ2 |End(Vk)) q∗l : End(Vk) −→ End(Wl)
is a completely positive SU(2)-irreducibly equivariant map (note that this map-
ping is not necessarily trace preserving). By Corollary 5.1.6, it is a multiple of
an SU(2)-irreducibly covariant channel, i.e. there exist SU(2)-covariant channel
ψk,l : End(Vk) −→ End(Wl), and a non-negative number λk,l such that
ql (Φ1 ⊗ Φ2 |End(Vk)) q∗l = λk,lψk,l
Consequently,
EP (Φ1 ⊗ Φ2 |End(Vk)) =
minm1,m2∑l=0
ql (Φ1 ⊗ Φ2 |End(Vk)) q∗l
=
minm1,m2∑l=0
λk,lψk,l
8. The Minimal Output Entropy of the Tensor Product of SU(2)-IrreduciblyCovariant Channels 139
By taking the trace of both sides for any state %, we get that
minm1,m2∑l=0
λk,l = 1
8.2 Bound for the minimal output entropy of the
tensor product of two SU(2)-irreducibly covari-
ant channels.
Recall the definition of von Neumann entropy, and the minimal output entropy given
in Section 6.1. Recall also if W is a subspace of a Hilbert space H, then End(W )
isomorphic to a subspace of End(H) via the map A 7−→
A 0
0 0
, see also Remark
1.2.11.
Lemma 8.2.1. Let H and K be Hilbert spaces, and W be a subspace of H. Let
Φ : End(H) −→ End(K) be a quantum channel. Then
Smin(Φ) ≤ Smin(Φ |End(W ))
Proof:
Let % ∈ End(W ) be a pure state, % can be considered as a pure state in End(H).
Thus,
Smin(Φ) = minS(%) : % ∈ P(H) ≤ minS(%) : % ∈ P(W ) = Smin(Φ |End(W ))
8. The Minimal Output Entropy of the Tensor Product of SU(2)-IrreduciblyCovariant Channels 140
The following result is proved in [12, p.226].
Lemma 8.2.2. Let H and K be Hilbert spaces, and Φ : End(H) −→ End(K) be a
unital quantum channel. Then S(%) ≤ S(Φ(%)) for % ∈ D(H), where S is the von
Neumann entropy.
Proposition 8.2.3. Let H,K and L be Hilbert spaces. Let Φ : End(H) −→ End(K)
be a quantum channel, and Ψ : End(K) −→ End(L) be a unital quantum channel.
Then S(Φ(%)) ≤ S(Ψ(Φ(%))) for % ∈ D(H). Consequently
Smin(Φ) ≤ Smin(Ψ Φ).
Recall by Corollary 2.3.6 that for ri,mi ∈ N, i = 1, 2, the space Pr1 ⊗ Pr2 =minr1,r2⊕
k=0
Vk (resp. Pm1⊗ Pm2
=minm1,m2⊕
l=0
Wl ), where Vk (resp. Wl) is an SU(2)-
irreducible space isomorphic to Pr1+r2−2k(resp Pm1+m2−2l). Keeping these notations,
we have
Corollary 8.2.4. Let Φ1 : End(Pr1) −→ End(Pm1) and Φ2 : End(Pr2) −→ End(Pm2
)
be SU(2)-covariant channels. For each 0 ≤ k ≤ minr1, r2, we have
Smin(Φ1 ⊗ Φ2) ≤ Smin
(minm1,m2∑
l=0
λk,lψk,l
)
where ψk,l : End(Vk) −→ End(Wl), 0 ≤ l ≤ minm1,m2 are SU(2)-irreducibly
covariant channels, and λk,l are non-negative real numbers withmin(m1,m2∑
l=0
λk,l = 1.
Proof:
Pick k such that 0 ≤ k ≤ minr1, r2, let Vk be the SU(2)-irreducible subspace
of Pr1 ⊗ Pr2 of dimension r1 + r2 − 2k. By Lemma 8.2.1,
Smin(Φ1 ⊗ Φ2) ≤ Smin(Φ1 ⊗ Φ2 |End(Vk))
8. The Minimal Output Entropy of the Tensor Product of SU(2)-IrreduciblyCovariant Channels 141
Let P = ql : 0 ≤ l ≤ minm1,m2 be the SU(2)-equivariant projections of Pm1⊗
Pm2onto the subspaces Wl. By Proposition 3.3.8, the map EP : End(Pm1
⊗Pm2) −→
m⊕i=1
End(Wi) defined by
EP(A) =minm1,m2∑
l=1
qlAq∗l
is a unital channel, so by Proposition 8.2.3, and Proposition 8.1.3, we have
Smin(Φ1 ⊗ Φ2) ≤ Smin(EP(Φ1 ⊗ Φ2 |End(Vk))) = Smin
(minm1,m2∑
l=0
λk,lψk,l
)
Appendix A
Background Results in Operator
Algebras
A.1 Background definitions and lemmas
As in the rest of the thesis, we assume all vector spaces to be complex vector spaces
of finite dimension.
Definition A.1.1. [31, p.4] Let H be a vector space. A norm on H is a map
‖·‖ : H −→ [0,∞)
such that
1. ‖x+ y‖ ≤ ‖x‖+ ‖y‖ for all vectors x, y in H.
2. ‖αx‖ = |α| ‖x‖ if x in H and α is a scalar.
3. ‖x‖ > 0 if x 6= 0 where x in H.
A vector space that equipped with a norm is called a normed space.
Definition A.1.2. Let H be a vector space. An inner (scalar) product on H is a
map 〈· |·〉 : H ×H −→ C, which is
143
A. Background Results in Operator Algebras 144
1. linear in the second argument,
i.e. 〈x |λy 〉 = λ 〈x |y 〉 and 〈x |y + z 〉 = 〈x |y 〉 + 〈x |z 〉, for all x, y, z in H and
all scalars λ ∈ C.
2. conjugate symmetric,
i.e. 〈x |y 〉 = 〈y |x〉, for all x, y in H.
3. positive definite, i.e. 〈x |x〉 ≥ 0 and 〈x |x〉 = 0 if and only if x = 0 for all x in
H.
A vector space H with an inner product is called an inner product space.
Remark A.1.3. In the definition above, we follow the definition that most physicists
use, as given in [10, p.1].
Lemma A.1.4. Let H be a vector space. An inner product on H induces a norm on
H, given by ‖x‖ =√〈x |x〉 for x ∈ H.
Definition A.1.5. A Hilbert space is an inner product space that is complete as a
normed space (with respect to the norm induced by its inner product).
Definition A.1.6. Let H be a vector space. The conjugate space H is the vector
space with the same underlying abelian group as H, and with scalar multiplication
(λ, v) 7−→ λ.v = λv.
If H is a Hilbert space, then H is also a Hilbert space endowed with the inner
product defined by 〈h1 |h2 〉H = 〈h2 |h1 〉H.
Notation A.1.7. For a Hilbert space H, let H∗ denote the vector space of all linear
forms on H. The space H∗ is called the dual space of H.
Theorem A.1.8. [6, p.40] Let H be a Hilbert space. The map
T : H −→ H∗
A. Background Results in Operator Algebras 145
h 7−→ fh : H −→ C
x 7−→ 〈h |x〉H
is isometric anti-isomorphism from H to H∗.
For vector spaces H and K, let End(H,K) denote the vector space of linear
maps from H to K. We write End(H) for End(H,H) and IH for the identity map
on H.
Definition A.1.9. Let H be a Hilbert space, and e1, e2, ...en be an orthonormal
basis of H. The un-normalized trace on End(H), is the linear map tr : End(H) −→ C
defined by
tr(T ) =n∑i=1
〈ei |Tei 〉H
The definition of the trace does not depend on the choice of the basis.
Lemma A.1.10. Let H be a Hilbert space. For T ∈ End(H), we have
tr(T ∗) = tr(T ) = tr(T ).
For Hilbert spaces H and K, the space End(H,K) endowed with the Hilbert-
Schmidt inner product given by 〈A |B 〉End(H,K)
= tr(A∗B) for A,B ∈ End(H,K) is a
Hilbert space.
Remark A.1.11. For T ∈ End(H,K), u ∈ H and λ ∈ C, we have
T (λ.u) = T (λu) = λT (u) = λ.T (u)
Hence, the map T is also linear regarded as a map from H to K. We use T to denote
T when it is regarded as a map of H to K.
Proposition A.1.12. Let H and K be Hilbert spaces. The Hilbert spaces End(H,K)
and End(H,K) are equal, and the Hilbert Schmidt inner product on them is the same.
A. Background Results in Operator Algebras 146
Definition A.1.13. For Hilbert spaces H, K and T ∈ End(H,K), the adjoint of T
is the unique linear map T ∗ ∈ End(K,H) such that
〈y |Tx〉K
= 〈T ∗y |x〉H
∀x ∈ H, ∀y ∈ K.
Definition A.1.14. [10, p.6-8]Let H be a Hilbert space, and T ∈ End(H). The
operatorT is called Hermitian (self adjoint) if T = T ∗. A positive operator T (denoted
by T ≥ 0), is a Hermitian operator with non-negative eigenvalues. An orthogonal
projection T is a positive operator with an eigenvalues belongs to 0, 1 . i.e. T 2 =
T = T ∗. Finally, T is a unitary operator if T satisfy T T ∗ = T ∗T = IH.
Lemma A.1.15. [10, p.6] Let H be a Hilbert space, and T ∈ End(H). The following
are equivalent:
1. T is a positive operator.
2. T = SS∗ for some S ∈ End(H).
3. 〈Tw |w 〉H≥ 0 for any w ∈ H.
Lemma A.1.16. Let K be a Hilbert space. For T ∈ End(K) and 0 6= w ∈ K, we
have
〈T |ww∗ 〉End(K)
= 〈Tw |w 〉K.
Proof:
Let fi : 1 ≤ i ≤ dK be an orthonormal basis for K with f1 = w‖w‖ . We hence
have:
〈T |ww∗ 〉End(K)
= tr(T ∗ww∗) =dK∑i=1
〈fi |T ∗ww∗fi 〉K
= 〈f1 |T ∗ww∗f1 〉K =⟨
w‖w‖
∣∣∣T ∗ww∗ ( w‖w‖
)⟩K
= 〈w |T ∗w 〉K
= 〈Tw |w 〉K.
A. Background Results in Operator Algebras 147
Proposition A.1.17. Let K be a Hilbert space, and T ∈ End(K). The operator T
is positive if and only if 〈T |X 〉End(K)
≥ 0 for all positive X.
Proof:
If T and X are positive, then T = T1T∗1 , X = X1X
∗1 for some T1, X1 ∈ End(K),
and
〈T |X 〉End(K)
= 〈T1T∗1 |X1X
∗1 〉End(K)
= tr (T1T∗1X1X
∗1 ) = tr ((T ∗1X1)∗ T ∗1X1) ≥0.
For the other direction, assume that 〈T |X 〉End(K)
≥ 0 for all positive X. As ww∗ is
positive for any w ∈ K, we have
〈Tw |w 〉K
= 〈T |ww∗ 〉End(K)
≥ 0
and T is positive.
Definition A.1.18. Let H be a Hilbert space, and W1, W2 be subspaces of H. We
say the spaces W1 and W2 are mutually orthogonal if 〈u1 | u2〉H = 0 for every u1 ∈ W1
and u2 ∈ W2.
Recall that if H1, H2, ....., Hn Hilbert spaces, their (external) direct sum denoted
byn⊕i=1
Hi, is the (h1, h2, ....., hn) : hi ∈ Hi. It is a Hilbert space with the inner
product given by 〈(h1, h2, ....., hn) | (k1, k2, ....., kn)〉 =n∑i=1
〈hi | ki〉Hi .
Definition A.1.19. Let H be a Hilbert space, and H1, H2, ....., Hn be subspaces of H,
such that H = H1 +H2 + · · · · ·+Hn, and Hi ∩
(∑i 6=jHj
)= 0, then H is called the
(internal) direct sum of Hi : 1 ≤ i ≤ n. If H1, H2, ....., Hn are mutually orthogonal
subspaces of H, then H is called the orthogonal direct sum of Hi : 1 ≤ i ≤ n.
If H1, H2, ....., Hn are subspaces of a Hilbert space H, satisfying the conditions in
Definition A.1.19, we identify the internal direct sum of Hi : 1 ≤ i ≤ n with their
A. Background Results in Operator Algebras 148
external direct sumn⊕i=1
Hi via
h = h1 + h2 + · · ·+ hn ←→ (h1, h2, · · · , hn)
Definition A.1.20. For i = 1, 2, let Hi and Ki be Hilbert spaces, and φi ∈ End(Hi, Ki).
Then φ1 ⊕ φ2 : H1 ⊕H2 −→ K1 ⊕K2 is the endomorphism given by
φ1 ⊕ φ2 (h1, h2) = (φ1 (h1) , φ2 (h2))
for (h1, h2) ∈ H1 ⊕H2.
Let H and K be two vector spaces, consider the free vector space L = C(H×K).
By identifying H ×K as a subset of L, one considers in L the subspace N generated
by the elements of the form
(λ1h1 + λ2h2, µ1k1 + µ2k2)− λ1µ1(h1, k1)− λ1µ2(h1, k2)− λ2µ1(h2, k1)− λ2µ2(h2, k2)
The tensor product of H and K, denoted by H ⊗ K is defined to be the quotient
vector space L/N . For h ∈ H and k ∈ K, the element h⊗ k denotes the element of
H ⊗ K represented by the element (h, k) of L/N . The tensor product of H and K
can be abstractly characterized as following:
Definition A.1.21. Let H and K be two vector spaces. The tensor product of H
and K is a vector space H ⊗K with a bilinear map Θ : H ×K −→ H ⊗K which is
universal in the following sense, if Ψ : H×K −→ V is bilinear map into some vector
space V , then there exists a unique linear map T : H⊗K −→ V such that T Θ = Ψ.
We denote Θ(h, k) by h ⊗ k, so the map T is characterized by T (h ⊗ k) = Ψ(h, k).
The space H ⊗ C is identified with H via the unitary map h⊗ λ 7−→ λh.
Proposition A.1.22. Let H and K be two vector spaces. If e1, e2, ....en and
f1, f2, ...fm are bases for H and K respectively, then ei⊗fj : 1 ≤ i ≤ n, 1 ≤ j ≤ m
forms a basis for H ⊗K. In particular dim(H ⊗K) = dim(H) · dim(K).
A. Background Results in Operator Algebras 149
Example A.1.23.
1. Cm ⊗ Cn ' Cmn.
2. For vector spaces H and K, we have End(H,K) ' K ⊗H∗.
According to the example above, the space End(H,K) is generated by xy∗ :
x ∈ K, y ∈ H, where y∗ denotes the linear form on H given by y∗(z) = 〈y |z 〉H
, and
xy∗ denotes the map xy∗(z) = 〈y |z 〉Hx for any z ∈ H.
Proposition A.1.24. For i = 1, 2, let Hi and Ki be vector spaces. If S ∈ End(H1, H2)
and T ∈ End(K1, K2), then there exists a unique linear map denoted S ⊗ T from
H1 ⊗K1 to H2 ⊗K2 characterized by S ⊗ T (h ⊗ k) = S(h) ⊗ T (k). If S and T are
isomorphisms, then S ⊗ T is an isomorphism with inverse S−1 ⊗ T−1.
Proposition A.1.25. For i = 1, 2, let Hi and Ki be vector spaces. There exist a
linear isomorphism T : End(H1, H2) ⊗ End(K1, K2) −→ End(H1 ⊗ K1, H2 ⊗ K2)
given by
T (A⊗B)(h1, k1) = A(h1)⊗B(k1)
for A⊗B ∈ End(H1, H2)⊗ End(K1, K2), and extending linearly.
Lemma A.1.26. Let H and K be inner product spaces whose inner products are
given by 〈· |·〉H
and 〈· |·〉K
respectively. There exists a unique inner product on H⊗K
such that 〈h1 ⊗ k1 |h2 ⊗ k2 〉H⊗K= 〈h1 |h2 〉H 〈k1 |k2 〉H. If H and K are Hilbert spaces,
then H ⊗K is a Hilbert space.
For the following proposition see [3, p.69, p.74].
Proposition A.1.27. Let (H, πH) and (K, πK) be two representations of a group G.
The tensor product πH ⊗ πK (resp. the direct sum πH ⊕ πK) defines a representation
of G in H ⊗K (resp. H ⊕K) given by
g 7−→ πH(g)⊗ πK(g)
A. Background Results in Operator Algebras 150
(resp. g 7−→ πH(g)⊕ πK(g))
A.2 Positive and completely positive maps
Definition A.2.1. Let H and K be two Hilbert spaces. A linear map Φ : End(H) −→
End(K) is
• positive if Φ(A) ≥ 0 for any positive A ∈ End(H).
• n-positive if Φ⊗ In is a positive map, where Φ⊗ In denotes the linear map from
End(H)⊗Mn into End(K)⊗Mn, such that
Φ⊗ In (A⊗B) = Φ(A)⊗B
for all A ∈ End(H) and B ∈Mn.
• completely positive if it is n-positive for each n ≥ 1.
Before stating the next proposition, we introduce the following maps that are
needed for the proof.
Notation A.2.2. For k ≥ 2,
• let ιk denote the canonical inclusion of Ck−1 in Ck ' Ck−1 × C given by
ιk : Ck−1 −→ Ck
x 7−→ (x, 0)
for x ∈ Ck−1. The adjoint map of ιk is the projection ι∗k : Ck −→ Ck−1 that
maps the first k − 1 component of x ∈ Ck to themselves, and the last one to
the zero.
A. Background Results in Operator Algebras 151
• For a Hilbert space H, let
– σH denote the map IH ⊗ ιk : H ⊗ Ck−1 −→ H ⊗ Ck.
– σ∗H denote the adjoint map of σH, IH ⊗ ι∗k : H ⊗ Ck −→ H ⊗ Ck−1.
Proposition A.2.3. Let H and K be Hilbert spaces, and Φ : End(H) −→ End(K)
be a linear map. For k ≥ 2, if Φ is k-positive, then it is (k − 1)-positive.
Proof:
Assume that Φ is k-positive. By Proposition 3.2.13, using the same notation in
A.2.3, we have
AdσH : End(H)⊗Mk−1 −→ End(H)⊗Mk
Adσ∗K : End(K)⊗Mk −→ End(K)⊗Mk−1
and
Φ⊗ Ik : End(H)⊗Mk −→ End(K)⊗Mk
are positive maps, so is the maps composition Adσ∗K (Φ⊗ Ik) AdσH : End(H) ⊗
Mk−1 −→ End(K)⊗Mk−1 which Φ⊗ Ik−1.
Proposition A.2.4. Let H and K be Hilbert spaces, and Φ : End(H) −→ End(K) be
a linear map. The map Φ is positive if and only if 〈Φ(A) |B 〉End(K)
≥ 0 for A ∈ End(H)
and B ∈ End(K) such that A,B ≥ 0.
Proof:
Let A ∈ End(H) and B ∈ End(K) such that A,B ≥ 0. Assume that Φ is
positive, then Φ(A) ≥ 0. Thus, there exist X, Y ∈ End(K) such that Φ(A) = XX∗
and B = Y Y ∗. Hence,
〈Φ(A) |B 〉End(K)
= 〈XX∗ |Y Y ∗ 〉End(K)
= tr(XX∗Y Y ∗) = tr((X∗Y )∗X∗Y ) ≥ 0.
A. Background Results in Operator Algebras 152
The other direction, follows by Proposition A.1.17.
Recall (by Definition 4.5.1) that the dual of a linear map Φ : End(H) −→
End(K) is the unique map Φ∗ : End(K) −→ End(H) such that
〈B |Φ(A)〉End(K)
= 〈Φ∗(B) |A〉End(H)
for all A ∈ End(H) and B ∈ End(K).
Proposition A.2.5. Let H and K be Hilbert spaces, and Φ : End(H) −→ End(K)
be a linear map. Then
1. Φ is a positive map if and only if Φ∗ is positive.
2. Φ is completely positive if and only if Φ∗ is completely positive.
3. Φ∗ is trace preserving map if and only if Φ(IH) = IK.
Proof:
The proof of (1) and (2) follows directly from Proposition A.2.4, as (Φ⊗ In)∗ =
Φ∗ ⊗ In for each n. For (3), note that for any T ∈ End(K), we have
tr(Φ∗(T )) = 〈IH |Φ∗(T )〉End(H)
= 〈Φ(IH) |T 〉End(K)
and
tr(T ) = 〈IK |T 〉End(K)
Hence, Φ∗ is trace preserving if and only if 〈Φ(IH) |T 〉End(K)
= 〈IK |T 〉End(K)for each
T ∈ End(K). i.e. if and only if Φ(IH) = IK.
Proposition A.2.6. Let (H, πH) and (K, πK) be two unitary representations of a
group G. A linear map Φ : End(H) −→ End(K) is G-equivariant if and only if Φ∗
is G-equivariant.
A. Background Results in Operator Algebras 153
Proof:
Assume Φ is G-equivariant. By Proposition 1.2.4,
Φ(πH(g)Aπ∗H(g)) = πK(g)Φ(A)π∗K(g) ∀g ∈ G
i.e.
Φ AdπH (g) = AdπK (g) Φ ∀g ∈ G
hence
Φ∗ AdπK (g) = AdπH (g) Φ∗ ∀g ∈ G
i.e
Φ∗ is G-equivariant.
As (Φ∗)∗ = Φ, the other direction also holds.
A.3 Covariant Stinespring dilation theorem
In this section, we state and give a proof of a special case of the covariant Stinespring
dilation theorem. The general case can be proved with some modification. The
following is a special case of the Stinespring dilation theorem [28, p.43-45].
Theorem A.3.1. Let H be finite dimensional Hilbert spaces, and Φ : Mn (C) −→
End(H) be a completely positive map. Then there exists a Hilbert space K, a unital
∗-homomorphism π : Mn(C) −→ End(K), and a bounded operator V : H −→ K
with ‖Φ(In)‖ = ‖V ‖2 such that
Φ(A) = V ∗π(A)V ∀A ∈Mn (C)
Remark A.3.2. If G is a group and ρ : G −→ End(Cn) a representation of G in
Cn then Adρ : G −→ End(Mn) where Adρ(g) = Adρ(g) is a representation of G in
Mn (C) .
A. Background Results in Operator Algebras 154
Following the proof’s steps of Stinespring dilation theorem in [28, p.43-45], we
give a proof of the following theorem :
Theorem A.3.3. (Covariant Stinespring dilation theorem ) Let n ∈ N, H be a finite
dimensional Hilbert space, (H, ρH) and (Cn, ρn) be two unitary representations of a
group G, and Φ : Mn (C) −→ End(H) be a completely positive G-equivariant map.
Then there exist
1. a finite dimensional Hilbert space K with a unitary representation σ of G in K,
2. a G-equivariant unital ∗−homomorphism π : Mn (C) −→ End(K), and
3. a G-equivariant bounded operator V : K −→ K such that
Φ(A) = V ∗π(A)V ∀A ∈Mn (C)
Proof:
We follow the scheme of the proof given in [28, p.43-45]. On the algebraic tensor
productMn(C)⊗H, we consider the pre-inner product 〈· |·〉 defined for A,B ∈Mn(C)
and x, y ∈ H by 〈A⊗ x |A⊗ y 〉 = 〈Φ(B∗A)x |y 〉H
where 〈· |·〉H
is the inner product
on H. As ΦAdρn(g) = AdρH(g) Φ, ∀g ∈ G, then for all A,B ∈Mn(C) and x, y ∈ H,
we have
⟨Adρn(g) ⊗ ρH(g) (A⊗ x)
∣∣Adρn(g) ⊗ ρH(g) (B ⊗ y)⟩
=⟨Adρn(g)(A)⊗ ρH(g) (x)
∣∣Adρn(g)(B)⊗ ρH(g) (y)⟩
=⟨Φ((Adρn(g)(B)
)∗Adρn(g)(A)
)ρH(g) (x) |ρH(g) (y)
⟩H
=⟨Φ(Adρn(g)(B
∗A))ρH(g) (x) |ρH(g) (y)
⟩H
= 〈ρH(g)Φ (B∗A) (ρH(g))∗ ρH(g) (x) |ρH(g) (y)〉H
= 〈ρH(g)Φ (B∗A) (x) |ρH(g) (y)〉H
A. Background Results in Operator Algebras 155
= 〈Φ (B∗A) (x) |y 〉H
= 〈A⊗ x |B ⊗ y 〉 .
Therefore, the map 〈· |·〉 is G -invariant under the action of ρ = Adρn(g) ⊗ ρH. Thus,
the subspace (as checked in [28])
N = u ∈Mn(C)⊗H : 〈u |v 〉 = 0 ∀ v ∈Mn(C)⊗H
is G-invariant under ρ. Hence, the induced bilinear form on K = (Mn(C)⊗H) /N is
a G-invariant inner product with respect to the action of G on K given by
σ(g)(u+N ) = ρ(g)(u) +N .
For A ∈Mn(C), the linear map π(A) : Mn ⊗H −→Mn ⊗H defined by
π(A)(∑
Ai ⊗ xi)
=∑
AAi ⊗ xi
satisfies
(Adρ(g)π(A))(∑
Ai ⊗ xi)
= (ρ(g)π(A)ρ∗(g))(∑
Ai ⊗ xi)
= ρ(g)π(A)(∑
ρ∗n(g)Aiρn(g)⊗ ρ∗H (g) (xi))
= ρ(g)
(∑Aρ∗n(g)Aiρn(g)⊗ ρ∗H (g) (xi)
)=∑
ρn(g) (Aρ∗n(g)Aiρn(g)) ρ∗n(g)⊗ ρH (g)ρ∗H (g) (xi)
=(∑
ρn(g)Aρ∗n(g)Ai ⊗ xi)
= π Adρn(g)(A)(∑
ai ⊗ xi).
So, π is aG-equivariant map for the actionAdρn(g) onMn (C) andAdρ on End(Mn⊗H)
with % = Adρn(g) ⊗ ρH. As shown in [28, p.43-45] π(A) leaves N invariant and thus
extends to a bounded linear operator on K, which is G-equivariant. Then π : Mn −→
End(K) is a unital ∗-homomorphism such that for each A ∈ Mn (C), g ∈ G and
u+N ∈ K, we have
(Adσ(g)π(A)) (u+N ) = (σ(g)π(a)σ∗(g)) (u+N )
A. Background Results in Operator Algebras 156
= ρ(g)π(A)ρ∗(g) (u) +N = π Adρn(g)(A)(u) +N
= π Adρn(g)(A)(u+N ).
So, Adσ(g) π = π Adρn(g), and π is G-equivariant for the actions Adρn(g) on Mn (C)
and Adσ on End(K). The map V : H −→ K defined by V (x) = In ⊗ x+N satisfies
V (ρH(g)(x)) = In ⊗ ρH(g)(x) +N
= Adρn(g)(In)⊗ ρH(g)(x) +N
= Adρn(g) ⊗ ρH(g)(In ⊗ x+N )
= σ(g)V (x)
As shown in [28, p.43-45], or by direct computation
Φ(A) = V ∗π(A)V
for each A ∈Mn (C) .
Appendix B
Deferred Proofs
B.1 Deferred proofs in chapter 2
The proof of Lemma 2.2.3
Recall that for m,n ∈ N, we identify the spaces Pm ⊗ Pn and Pm,n, and by Remark
2.2.1, we have
ρm(g)⊗ ρn(g)f(x, y) = f(ax1 − bx2, bx1 + ax2, ay1 − by2, by1 + ay2)
where f(x, y) := f(x1, x2, y1, y2) ∈ Pm ⊗ Pn, and g =[
a b
−b a
]∈ SU(2). Intuitively,
the action of SU(2) on any polynomial f(x, y) in Pm ⊗ Pn, is by replacing x1 by
ax1 − bx2, x2 by bx1 + ax2, y1 by ay1 − by2 and y2 by by1 + ay2. The next lemma is
direct computations on the standard bases elements for Pm−1 ⊗ Pn and Pm ⊗ Pn−1
Lemma B.1.1. For m,n ∈ N. Let Mxi : Pm−1 ⊗ Pn −→ Pm ⊗ Pn, and Myi :
Pm ⊗ Pn−1 −→ Pm ⊗ Pn denote the multiplication by xi and yi respectively. Then(∂∂xi
)∗= Mxi and
(∂∂yi
)∗= Myi for each i = 1, 2.
Recall the maps ∆xy , ∆yx , Γxy and Ωxy in Definition 2.2.2.
157
B. Deferred Proofs 158
Lemma B.1.2. The operators ∆xy , ∆yx , Γxy and Ωxy are SU(2)-equivariant, and
satisfy
∆∗xy = ∆yx, Γ∗xy = Ωxy
Proof:
Let x := (x1, x2), y = (y1, y2), f(x, y) ∈ Pm ⊗ Pn, and g =[
a b
−b a
]∈SU(2).
Using Remark 2.2.1, we get
∂
∂x1
(ρm(g)⊗ ρn(g)f(x, y)) = a∂
∂x1
(ρm(g)⊗ ρn(g)f(x, y)) + b∂
∂x2
(ρm(g)⊗ ρn(g)f(x, y))
and
∂
∂x2
(ρm(g)⊗ ρn(g)f(x, y)) = −b ∂
∂x1
(ρm(g)⊗ ρn(g)f(x, y)) + a∂
∂x2
(ρm(g)⊗ ρn(g)f(x, y))
Hence,
∆yx(ρm(g)⊗ ρn(g)f(x, y)) = y1∂
∂x1
(ρm(g)⊗ ρn(g)f(x, y)) + y2∂
∂x2
(ρm(g)⊗ ρn(g)f(x, y))
= (ay1 − by2)∂
∂x1
(ρm(g)⊗ ρn(g)f(x, y)) + (by1 + ay2)∂
∂x2
(ρm(g)⊗ ρn(g)f(x, y))
= (ρm−1(g)⊗ ρn+1(g))
(y1
∂
∂x1
f ((x, y)) + y2∂
∂x2
f ((x, y))
)= (ρm−1(g)⊗ ρn+1(g)) ∆yx(f(x, y)).
i.e. ∆yx is SU(2)-equivariant.
By Lemma B.1.1, we have
〈∆xy (f(x, y)) |g(x, y)〉Pm+1⊗Pn−1
= 〈f(x, y) |∆yx (g(x, y))〉Pm⊗Pn
for g(x, y) ∈ Pm+1 ⊗ Pn−1, then ∆∗yx = ∆xy . By Proposition 1.2.7, the map ∆xy is
also SU(2)-equivariant.
Similarly, we have:
(ρm+1(g)⊗ ρn+1(g)) Γxy (f(x, y)) = (ρm+1(g)⊗ ρn+1(g)) ((x1y2 − y1x2) f(x, y))
B. Deferred Proofs 159
=[(ax1 − bx2)(by1 + ay2)− (ay1 − by2)(bx1 + ax2)
]f(ax1− bx2, bx1 + ax2, ay1−
by2, by1 + ay2)
= (aax1y2 − bbx2y1 + bbx1y2 − aax2y1) (ρm(g)⊗ ρn(g)f(x1, x2, y1, y2))
= (aa+ bb)(x1y2 − x2y1) (ρm(g)⊗ ρn(g)f(x1, x2, y1, y2))
= det(g)(x1y2 − x2y1) (ρm(g)⊗ ρn(g)f(x, y))
= Γxy (ρm(g)⊗ ρn(g)f(x, y))
Thus Γxy is SU(2)-equivariant. By Lemma B.1.1, we have
〈Γxy (f(x, y)) |g(x, y)〉Pm+1⊗Pn+1
= 〈f(x, y) |Ωxy (g(x, y))〉Pm⊗Pn
for g(x, y) ∈ Pm+1 ⊗ Pn+1, which gives Γ∗xy = Ωxy. By Proposition 1.2.7, Ωxy is
SU(2)-equivariant.
The proof of Lemma 2.3.11
Recall the isometry αm,n,h in Definition 2.3.2.
Lemma B.1.3. For m,n, h ∈ N with 0 ≤ h ≤ minm,n, let r = m+n− 2h. Using
the standard basis for Pk where k ∈ m,n, r, we have:
1. αm,n,h (f ri ) =h∑s=0
mini+s, n−h+s∑j=maxs,−m+i+h+s
βm,n,hi,s,j fmlij ⊗ fnj
2. α∗m,n,h(fml ⊗ fnj
)=
(minh,j,m−l∑
s=max0,h−l,h+j−nβm,n,hl+j−h,s,j
)f rl+j−h if 0 ≤ l + j − h ≤ r
0 otherwise
B. Deferred Proofs 160
where βm,n,hi,s,j = (−1)s(hs
)(n−hj−s
)(m−hi−j+s
)(m−h)!
√cm,n,hr! m! n!
(ri) ( mi−j+h) (nj)
Proof:
Recall that the standard basic element of Pk is f ki = aikxi1x
k−i2 where aik =
1√i!(k−i)!
.
As
∆n−hyx =
(y1
∂∂x1
+ y2∂∂x2
)n−h=
n−h∑t=0
(n−ht )yt1yn−h−t2
∂t
∂xt1
∂n−h−t
∂xn−h−t2
and
Γhxy = (x1y2 − y1x2)h =h∑s=0
(−1)s(hs) (x1y2)h−s (x2y1)s
by the definition of αm,n,h, we have:
For 0 ≤ i ≤ r
αm,n,h (f ri ) =√cm,n,ha
ir
h∑s=0
n−h∑t=0
(−1)s(hs)(n−ht )xh−s1 xs2y
(t+s)1 y
n−(s+t)2
∂t
∂xt1xi1
∂n−h−t
∂xn−h−t2
xr−i2
But
∂t
∂xt1xi1
∂n−h−t
∂xn−h−t2
xr−i2 =
i!(r−i)!
(i−t)!(m−h−i+t)! xi−t1 xm+t−h−i
2 −m+ i+ h ≤ t ≤ i
0 otherwise
Thus, we can rewrite the above sum as
αm,n,h (f ri ) =√cm,n,ha
ir
h∑s=0
mini, n−h∑t=max0,−m+i+h
U(m,n, h, i, s, t)xh−(s+t)+i1 x
m+(s+t)−h−i2 y
(t+s)1 y
n−(s+t)2
where U(m,n, h, i, s, t) = (−1)s(hs
)(n−ht
) i!(r−i)!(i−t)!(m−h−i+t)! .
Changing the summation variable in the inner sum to j = s+ t , we obtain
αm,n,h (f ri ) =√cm,n,ha
ir
h∑s=0
mini+s, n−h+s∑j=maxs,−m+i+h+s
(−1)s(hs
) (n−hj−s
) i!(r−i)!(i−j+s)!(m−h−i+j−s)!x
lij1 x
m−lij2 yj1y
n−j2
B. Deferred Proofs 161
Finally, asair
alijm a
jn
=√
j! lij !(m−lij)!(n−j)!i!(r−i)! , then
αm,n,h (f ri ) =√cm,n,h
h∑s=0
mini+s, n−h+s∑j=maxs,−m+i+h+s
(−1)s(hs
)(n−hj−s
)(m−hi−j+s
)(m−h)!
√r! m! n!
(ri) (mlij) (nj)fmlij f
nj
=h∑s=0
mini+s, n−h+s∑j=maxs,−m+i+h+s
βm,n,hi,s,j fmlij ⊗ fnj
In similar way, As
∆n−hxy =
n−h∑t=0
(n−ht
)xn−h−t1 xt2
∂n−h−t
∂yn−h−t1
∂t
∂yt2
and
Ωhxy =
h∑s=0
(−1)s(hs)∂h−s
∂xh−s1
∂s
∂xs2
∂h−s
∂yh−s2
∂s
∂ys1
then by Lemma 2.3.4, we have
α∗m,n,h(fml ⊗ fnj
)= √
cm,n,h almajn
n−h∑t=0
h∑s=0
(−1)s(hs) (n−ht )xn−h−t1 xt2∂h−s
∂xh−s1
(xl1) ∂s
∂xs2(xm−l2 ) ∂n−h−t+s
∂yn−h−t+s1
yj1∂h−s+t
∂yh−s+t2
yn−j2
= √cm,n,h alma
jn
h∑s=0
n−h∑t=0
(−1)s(hs) (n−ht )xn−h−t1 xt2∂h−s
∂xh−s1
(xl1) ∂s
∂xs2(xm−l2 ) ∂n−h−t+s
∂yn−h−t+s1
yj1∂h−s+t
∂yh−s+t2
yn−j2
but
∂n−h−t+s
∂yn−h−t+s1
yj1∂h−s+t
∂yh−s+t2
yn−j2 =
j! (n−j)! s = t− n+ h+ j
0 otherwise
and
∂h−s
∂xh−s1
(xl1) ∂
s
∂xs2
(xm−l2
)=
l!
(l−h+s)!xl−h+s
1(m−l)!
(m−l−s)! xm−l−s2 h− l ≤ s ≤ m− l
0 otherwise
As for 0 ≤ t ≤ n− h we have h+ j − n ≤ s ≤ j, then
B. Deferred Proofs 162
∂h−s
∂xh−s1
(xl1) ∂s
∂xs2(xm−l2 ) ∂n−h−t+s
∂yn−h−t+s1
yj1∂h−s+t
∂yh−s+t2
yn−j2
=
j! (n−j)!l!(m−l)!
(l−h+s)!(m−l−s)! xl−h+s1 xm−l−s2 maxh− l, h+ j − n ≤ s ≤ minj,m− l
0 otherwise
As for h + j − n ≤ s ≤ j, the condition h − l ≤ s ≤ m − l is equivalent to
0 ≤ l + j − h ≤ r , we have
• If l and j satisfy 0 ≤ l + j − h ≤ r , then
Hence
α∗m,n,h(fml ⊗ fnj
)=√cm,n,h a
lma
jn
minh,j,m−l∑s=max0,h−l,h+j−n
(−1)s(hs) (n−hj−s)j! (n−j)!l!(m−l)!
(l−h+s)!(m−l−s)! xl+j−h1 xr−l−j+h2
=
(minh,j,m−l∑
s=max0,h−l,h+j−n
(−1)s
(n−hj−s
) (hs
) (m−hl−h+s
)(m−h)!
√cm,n,hr!m!n!(ml
)(nj
)(r
l+j−h
)) al+j−hr xl+j−h1 xr−l−j+h2
=
(minh,j,m−l∑
s=max0,h−l,h+j−n
βm,n,hl+j−h,s,j
)f rl+j−h.
• Otherwise, α∗m,n,h(fml ⊗ fnj
)= 0.
The proof of Corollary 2.3.15
Recall that
εji (m,n,h) =
minh,j,j+m−i−h∑s=max0,j−i,j+h−n
βm,n,hi,s,j
where βm,n,hi,s,j = (−1)s(hs
)(n−hj−s
)(m−hi−j+s
)(m−h)!
√cm,n,hr! m! n!
(ri) ( mi−j+h) (nj)
.
B. Deferred Proofs 163
Corollary B.1.4. For m,n, h ∈ N with 0 ≤ h ≤ minm,n, let r = m+n−2h. The
matrix coefficients εji := εji (m,n,h) of the isometry αm,n,h satisfy
1. εji = (−1)hεn−jr−i for any 0 ≤ i ≤ r and j ∈ B(i).
2. εi+hi = βm,n,hi,h,h+i for any i ≤ n− h.
3. For n− h ≤ i ≤ r, εni = βm,n,hi,h,n = (−1)h∣∣∣βm,n,hi,h,n
∣∣∣ 6= 0.
4. For j ∈ B(0), we have εj0 = βm,n,h0,j,j = (−1)j
∣∣∣βm,n,h0,j,j
∣∣∣ 6= 0.
5. For 0 ≤ i ≤ m− h we have ε0i = βm,n,hi,0,0 6= 0.
6. For j ∈ B(i), we have εji (m,n,n) = βm,n,ni,j,j and εji (m,n,0) = βm,n,0i,0,j
Proof:
(1) Let g0 =[
0 1
−1 0
]. By the SU(2)-equivariance of αm,n,h, we have
(ρm(g0)⊗ ρn(g0))αm,n,hρ∗r(g0)(f ri ) = αm,n,h(f
r
i )
for 0 ≤ i ≤ r.
As
• ρ∗r (g0) (f ri ) = (−1)r−if rr−i,
• ρm(g0) (fml ) = (−1)lfmm−l , and
• ρn(g0)(fnj)
= (−1)jfnn−j
using Corollary 2.3.13, the above equation can be written as
(−1)h
minr−i+h, n∑s=max0,−m+r−i+h
εsr−i fm
li(n−s)⊗ fnn−s =
mini+h, n∑j=max0,−m+i+h
εji fm
lij⊗ fnj
Let t = n− s.
Since n−max0,−m+ r − i+ h = mini+ h, n, and
B. Deferred Proofs 164
n−minr − i+ h, n = max0,−m+ i+ h, we have:
(−1)h
mini+h, n∑t=max0,−m+i+h
εn−tr−i fm
lit⊗ fnt =
mini+h, n∑j=max0,−m+i+h
εji fm
lij⊗ fnj
By the linearly independence of the vectors fml ⊗ fnj , the last equality implies that
(−1)hεn−jr−i = εji for any j such that max0,−m+ i+ h ≤ j ≤ mini+ h, n.
The other statements follow by direct computations.
The proof of Lemma 2.4.11
Lemma B.1.5. For m ∈ Nr 0.
m−1∑k=0
(m−1k
)2(mk+1
)(mk
) = m(m+1)(m+2)6m2
Proof:
m−1∑k=0
(m−1k
)2(mk+1
)(mk
) = 1m2
m−1∑k=0
(k+1)(m−k) = 1m2
m∑k=1
k(m− k + 1) = 1m2
[m∑k=1
k(m+ 1)−m∑k=1
k2
]Since
m∑k=1
k = m(m+1)2
, andm∑k=1
k2 = m(m+1)(2m+1)6
the result follows.
Recall that B(i) := j : max0,−m+ i+ h ≤ j ≤ mini+ h, n.
Lemma B.1.6. Let m ∈ N \ 0 and εji := εji (m,m,m−1). The following identities hold
1. εj0 = (−1)j
√6(j+1)(m−j)m(m+1)(m+2)
for 0 ≤ j ≤ m− 1.
2. εj1 = (−1)j√
3m(m+1)(m+2)
(m− 2j) for 0 ≤ j ≤ m.
B. Deferred Proofs 165
3. εj2 = (−1)j−1
√6j(m−j+1)
m(m+1)(m+2)for 1 ≤ j ≤ m.
Proof:
1. For j ∈ B(0) = j : 0 ≤ j ≤ m− 1, using Lemma B.1.5, we have
εj0 =
minm−1,j,j+1∑s=max0,j,j−1
βm,m,m−10,s,j =
j∑s=j
βm,m,m−10,s,j = βm,m,m−1
0,j,j = (−1)j
√6(j+1)(m−j)m(m+1)(m+2)
2. For j ∈ B(1) = j : 0 ≤ j ≤ m, we have
εj1 =
minm−1,j∑s=max0,,j−1
βm,m,m−11,s,j =
βm,m,m−11,0,0 j = 0
βm,m,m−11,j−1,j + βm,m,m−1
1,j,j 1 ≤ j ≤ m− 1
βm,m,m−11,m−1,m j = m
by Lemma B.1.5, we get:
• βm,m,m−11,0,0 =
√3m
(m+1)(m+2).
• βm,m,m−11,j−1,j + βm,m,m−1
1,j,j = (−1)j√
3m(m+1)(m+2)
(m− 2j) for any 1 ≤ j ≤ m− 1.
• βm,m,m−11,m−1,m = (−1)m−1
√3m
(m+1)(m+2).
In all cases, we have εj1 = (−1)j√
3m(m+1)(m+2)
(m− 2j).
3. Similarly for j ∈ B(2) = j : 1 ≤ j ≤ m, we have
εj2 =
minm−1,j,j−1∑s=max0,,j−2,j−1
βm,m,m−12,s,j =
,j−1∑s=,j−1
βm,m,m−12,s,j = βm,m,m−1
2,j−1,j = (−1)j−1
√6j(m−j+1)
m(m+1)(m+2).
B. Deferred Proofs 166
B.2 Proofs in chapter 5
The proof of Theorem 5.2.2
Recall the definition of direct sum of operator in Definition 5.2.1.
Theorem B.2.1. Let G be a group. Let H =r⊕t=1
Wt where Wt : 1 ≤ t ≤ r are
nonequivalent G-irreducible spaces, and K =m⊕s=1
Vs where Vs : 1 ≤ s ≤ m are
nonequivalent G-irreducible space. If there exist k ∈ N, such that
1. For each 1 ≤ t ≤ k , Wt ' Vt via a G-equivariant isomorphism
ψt : Wt −→ Vt
2. For each t > k the subspace Wt is not equivalent to any of the Vs for any
1 ≤ s ≤ m.
Then, for any G-equivariant map Φ : H −→ K, there exist λ1, λ2, ........., λk such
that Φ is the orthogonal direct sum of the operators λtψt : 1 ≤ t ≤ k
i.e.
Φ =k⊕t=1
λtψt
Proof:
By the assumption in (1) and (2), and since the multiplicities of the subspaces Wt
and Vs, in H and K are one, we have Wt Vs for any s 6= t. Let ιt, ιs and qt, qs denote
the inclusion maps, and the orthogonal projections of Wt and Vs respectively. As the
maps ιt, ιs,qt, qs are G-equivariant maps (Lemma 1.2.10), the maps composition
qsΦιt : Wt −→ Vs
is G-equivariant for any any 1 ≤ s ≤ m and 1 ≤ t ≤ r. By Schur’s Lemma 1.2.12,
the map qsΦιt is a zero map for s 6= t.
B. Deferred Proofs 167
If s = t, then by Schur’s Lemma a gain, the map ψ−1t qtΦιt : Wt −→ Wt is multiple of
the identity. i.e. ψ−1t qtΦιt = λtIWt for some λt ∈ C. That is
Φ |Wt = λtψt
For u ∈ H =r⊕t=1
Wt, we have
Φ(u) = Φ(u1, u2, ....ur) ut ∈ Wt
Thus
Φ(u) = (λ1ψ1(u1), λ2ψ2(u2), ...., λkψk(uk), 0, .., 0)
B.3 Proofs in Chapter 7
The proof of Lemma 7.2.4
Recall that for m ∈ N r 0, the EPOSIC Kraus channel Φm,1,1 : End(Pm−1) −→
End(Pm) has two Kraus operator T0, T1 (Definition 4.2.1). For a pure state % = ww∗
in End(Pm−1), the set UΦm,n,n,% = u0, u1 where uj = Tjw , j = 1, 2, by Remark 6.1.8,
we have Φm,1,1(ww∗) =
i∑j=0
uju∗j . The following lemma follows by direct computations
using the formula εji (m,n,h) =minh,j,j+m−i−h∑s=max0,j−i,j+h−n
βm,n,hi,s,j given in Corollary 2.3.13. Item (3)
follows as Φm,1,1 is trace preserving.
Lemma B.3.1. For m ∈ Nr 0 and εji := εji (m,1,1), we have
1. ε0l =
√l+1m+1
, ε1l = −
√m−lm+1
, and (ε0l )
2 + (ε1l )
2 = 1, for 0 ≤ l ≤ m− 1.
2. (ε0l )
2 = (ε0l−1)
2 + 1m+1
, and (ε1l−1)
2 = (ε1l )
2 + 1m+1
, for 1 ≤ l ≤ m− 1.
B. Deferred Proofs 168
3. ‖u0‖2 + ‖u1‖2 = 1.
Following the same notations in Proposition 7.2.3, we have
Lemma B.3.2. Let m ∈ Nr0. The minimal value of R = ‖u0‖2 ‖u1‖2−|〈u0 |u1 〉|2
is m(m+1)2 .
Proof:
Let w =m−1∑l=0
wlfm−1l ∈ Pm−1 be a unit vector. By Lemma 7.1.5, we have
u0 =m∑l=1
ε0l−1wl−1f
ml and u1 =
m−1∑l=0
ε1lwlf
ml .
Thus
〈u0 |u1 〉 =m−1∑l=1
ε0
l−1wl−1ε1
lwl =m−1∑l=1
ε0
l−1wlε1
lwl−1 = 〈v0 |v1 〉
where v0 =m−1∑l=1
ε0l−1wlf
ml , and v1 =
m−1∑l=1
ε1lwl−1f
ml .
Using Lemma B.3.1, we obtain
‖v0‖2 =m−1∑l=1
(ε0
l−1
)2 |wl|2 =m−1∑l=1
(ε0
l−1
)2 |wl|2 +‖w‖2
m+1− ‖w‖
2
m+1
= 1m+1|w0|2 +
m−1∑l=1
((ε0l−1
)2+ 1
m+1
)|wl|2 −
‖w‖2
m+1
= (ε00)
2 |w0|2 +m−1∑l=1
(ε0l )
2 |wl|2 − 1m+1
Note that ‖w‖2 =m−1∑l=0
|wl|2 = 1.
Thus
‖v0‖2 =m−1∑l=0
(ε0
l )2 |wl|2 − 1
m+1=
m∑l=1
(ε0l−1
)2 |wl−1|2 − 1m+1
= ‖u0‖2 − 1m+1
Similarly ‖v1‖2 = ‖u1‖2 − 1m+1
. So
|〈u0 |u1 〉|2 = |〈v0 |v1 〉|2 ≤ ‖v0‖2 ‖v1‖2 =(‖u0‖2 − 1
m+1
) (‖u1‖2 − 1
m+1
)
B. Deferred Proofs 169
= ‖u0‖2 ‖u1‖2 − 1m+1
(‖u0‖2 + ‖u1‖2)+ 1
(m+1)2 = ‖u0‖2 ‖u1‖2 − m(m+1)2
Thus
R = ‖u0‖2 ‖u1‖2 − |〈u0 |u1 〉|2 ≥ m(m+1)2
and m(m+1)2 is a lower bound for R. To verify that m
(m+1)2 is the minimal value of R,
compute R at w0 = (1, 0, . . . , 0)t to get Rw0 = m(m+1)2 .
Appendix C
List of Equations That Are Used in
The Computation
For m,n, h ∈ N with 0 ≤ h ≤ minm,n, let r = m+ n− 2h then
• cm,n,h =((m−h)!)2
r! m! n!
(h∑j=0
(hj
)2
( mh−j) (nj)
)
• βm,n,hi,s,j = (−1)s(hs
)(n−hj−s
)(m−hi−j+s
)(m−h)!
√cm,n,hr! m! n!
(ri) ( mi−j+h) (nj)
.
• εji (m,n,h) =minh,j,j+m−i−h∑s=max0,j−i,j+h−n
βm,n,hi,s,j .
• lij = h+ i− j.
• For 0 ≤ i ≤ r, B(i) = j : max0,−m+ i+ h ≤ j ≤ mini+ h, n.
170
C. List of Equations That Are Used in The Computation 171
•fml = almx
l1x
m−l2 : 0 ≤ l ≤ m
where alm =
1√l!(m−l)!
.
• Jm(fml ) = (−1)lfmm−l and J∗m(fml ) = (−1)m−lfmm−l.
• Pm ⊗ Pn 'minm,n⊕h=0
Pm+n−2h.
• αm,n,h (f ri ) =∑
j∈B(i)
εji (m,n,h) fmlij ⊗ fnj .
• ηm,n,h = (IPm ⊗ Jn)αm,n,h : Pm+n−2h −→ Pm ⊗ P n.
• α∗m,n,h(fml ⊗ fnj
)=
εjl+j−hf
rl+j−h if 0 ≤ l + j − h ≤ r
0 otherwise
.
• Φm,n,h(fri1f r∗i2
) =∑
j∈B(i1)∩B(i2)
εji1εji2fmli1j
fm∗
li2j.
• C(Φm,n,h) =r∑
i1,i2=0
( ∑j∈B(i1)∩B(i2)
εji1εji2fmli1j
fm∗
li2j
)⊗ Ei1i2 .
• C(Φm,n,h) = r+1n+1
qm,r,m−h.
• λ2t =
r∑j=m−h
(−1)t+jεjt (r,r,r−t)(εr−j+hr−j (m,n,h))2
m!√cm,m,m−t
•m∑k=1
k = m(m+1)2
, andm∑k=1
k2 = m(m+1)(2m+1)6
.
C. List of Equations That Are Used in The Computation 172
•m∑k=1
k(m− k + 1) = m(m+1)(m+2)6
andm∑k=1
k(k + 1) = m(m+1)(m+2)3
.
Bibliography
[1] G. Amosov, A. Holevo and R. Werner, On some additivity problems in Quantum
Information Theory, Probl. Inf. Transm 36 (2000) 305-313.
[2] C.H. Bennett and P.W. Shor, Quantum Information Theory, IEEE Trans. Info.
Theory, Vol 44 (6 ) (1998) 2724–2748.
[3] T. Brocker and T. Dieck, Representations of Compact Lie Groups,
Springer-Verlag New York Inc. 1985.
[4] L. Chen, and D. Dokovic, Distillability and PPT entanglement of low-rank
quantum states, Journal of Physics. A, Mathematical and Theoretical, 44 (28)
(2011).
[5] M. Choi, Completely positive linear maps on complex matrices, Linear Algebra.
Appl. 10 (1975) 285-290.
[6] Y. Eidelman, V. Milman, and A. Tsolomitis, Functional analysis An intro-
duction, American Mathematical Society, Volume 66, ISBN 0-8218-3646-3.
[7] M. Fannes, B. Haegeman, M. Mosonyi, and D. Vanpeteghem, Additivity of
minimal entropy output for a class of covariant channels, preprint (2004), arXiv:
quant-ph/0410195.
[8] G. Folland, A course in Abstract Harmonic Analysis, CRC press, 1995.
173
BIBLIOGRAPHY 174
[9] W. Fulton and J. Harris, Representation Theory A first Course, Springer-
Verlag,1991.
[10] P. Harpe and V. Jones. An introduction to C∗-Algebras. Chapter 1 to 9. Uni-
versite de Geneve. Section de Mathematiques, 1995.
[11] M. Hastings, Super additivity of communication capacity using entangled in-
puts, Nature Physics 5 (2009) 255-257.
[12] M. Hayashi, Quantum Information An Introduction, Springer-Verlag
Berlin Heidelberg, 2006.
[13] E. Hewitt and K. A. Ross Abstract Harmonic Analysis I, Second Edition,
A Series of Comprehensive studies in Mathematics 115, Springer-Verlag, 1979.
[14] A. Holevo, Additivity conjecture and covariant channel, Int. J. Quant.Inform.
3 (1) (2005) 41-48.
[15] A. Holevo, Complementary channel and the additivity problem, Theory Probab.
Appl. Vol 51 (1) (2007) 92-100.
[16] A. Holevo, Quantum systems, Channels, Information: A Mathematical
Introduction, Walter de Gruyter GmbH, Berlin/Boston, 2012.
[17] A. Holevo, The additivity problem in quantum information theory, Section
Lectures, ICM 2006 Madrid, Mathematical Aspect of Computer Science, 2006.
[18] A. Holevo, The capacity of quantum communication channel with general signal
states, IEEE Trans. Inform. Theory 44 (1) (1998) 269-272.
[19] A. Holevo and V. Giovannetti, Quantum channels and their entropic character-
istics, Rep. Prog. Phys.75 (2012) 046001 (30pp).
BIBLIOGRAPHY 175
[20] M. Horodecki, P. Shor, and M. Ruskai, General Entanglement Breaking Chan-
nels, Rev.Math.Phys 15, (2003) 629-641 .
[21] P. Horodecki, J.Smolin, B.Terhal, and A.Thapliyal, Rank two bipartite bound
entangled states do not exist, em J. Theor. Computer Science 292, (2003) 589-
596.
[22] M. Horodecki, and M. Horodecki, Reduction criterion of separability and limits
for a class of protocols of entanglement distillation, preprint (1998), arXiv:
quant-ph/9708015.
[23] A. Jamio lkowski, Linear transformations which preserve trace and positive semi
definiteness of operators, Reports on Mathematical Physics, 3 (4) (1972) 275-
278.
[24] C. King, Additivity for unital qubit channels, Journal of Mathematical Physics.
Vol 43(10), 2002.
[25] C. King and M. Ruskai, Minimal entropy of states emerging from noisy quantum
channels, IEEE Tran. Info. Theory, 47, 192-209 (2001).
[26] C. King, The capacity of the quantum depolarizing channel, IEEE Transactions
on Information Theory, 49, 221 (2003).
[27] M. Nielsen, I. Chuang, Quantum Computation and Quantum Informa-
tion, Cambridge university press,UK, 2000.
[28] V. Paulsen, Completely bounded maps and operator algebras, Cam-
bridge university press, UK, 2002.
[29] C. Procesi, Lie Groups An Approach through Invariants and Repre-
sentations, Springer Science+ Business Media, LLC, 2007.
BIBLIOGRAPHY 176
[30] A. Robert, Introduction to the Representation Theory of Compact and
Locally Compact Groups, Cambridge University Press, UK, 1983.
[31] W. Rudin, Functional Analysis, McGraw-Hill, Inc. (1973).
[32] B. Schumacher, and M. Westmoreland, Sending classical information via noisy
quantum channel, Phys.Rev.A 56 (1) (1997) 131-138.
[33] J.-P. Serre, Linear Representations of Finite Groups, Springer-Verlag New
York Inc. 1977.
[34] P. Shor, Additivity of the Classical Capacity of Entanglement-Breaking Quan-
tum channels, J.Math.Phys.Vol 43, (9) (2002) 4334-4340 .
[35] P. Shor, Capacities of quantum channels and how to find them, Mathematical
Programming 97 (2003) 311-335 .
[36] P. Shor, Equivalence of additivity questions in quantum information theory,
Commun. Math. Phys. 246 (3) (2004).
[37] B. Simon, Representation of finite and compact groups, American Math-
ematical Society, Graduate Studies in Mathematics, Volume 10, (1996).
[38] S. Sternberg, Group Theory And Physics, Cambridge University Press, UK,
1994.
[39] N.Ja. Vilenkin, A.U. Klimyk, Representation of Lie Groups and Special
Functions, Volume 1 :Simplest Lie Groups, Special Functions and Integral
Transforms. Kluwer academic publishers. Dordrecht/Boston/London, 1991.
[40] K.Vollbrecht and R. Werner, Entanglement measures under symmetry,
Phys.Rev.A 64, 2011.